Download Handspring Treo 90 Handheld

Treo™ 90 Handheld
User Guide
Windows Edition
Copyright
Copyright © 2002 Handspring, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Handspring, Treo, and the Treo logo are trademarks of
Handspring, Inc. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Blazer and the Handspring logo are trademarks of
Handspring Inc., are registered trademarks in the U.S.A., and may be registered in other jurisdictions. Portions copyright © 1998-2002 Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Palm OS and HotSync are registered trademarks and Palm and the Palm Powered logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. and are used by Handspring under license.
The SD logo is a trademark. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Handspring, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for: (i) any damage or loss resulting from the use of this
handbook, (ii) any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software, or (iii) any damage
or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies
of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.
Warranty and License Agreement
In order to obtain warranty service, you must immediately notify Handspring of any defect within the warranty period
and provide dated proof of original purchase. For further information about the warranty service procedure, please
visit our website at: http://www.handspring.com
A copy of the Warranty and End User License Agreement are included in this guide. You can also view a copy of
the warranty on our website at http://support.handspring.com/esupport/forms/hsFileList.jsp?Type=Warranties.
The information included in this guide sets forth Handspring's sole and complete warranty and software licensing
obligations with respect to your Handspring product. Use of the product indicates your acceptance of the terms of
the warranty and the End User License Agreement.
Software download available
Wireless setup and desktop synchronization software are supplied on the Handspring CD-ROM disc. If you do not
have access to a CD-ROM drive for your computer, you can download this software from www.handspring.com.
Page 2
Windows Edition
Contents
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Getting to know your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
What is a Treo handheld? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Upgrade information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Treo components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Locking and unlocking the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Adjusting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Using the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Using the stylus to get things done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Elements of the handheld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Displaying online tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Customizing your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Connecting the HotSync cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Using desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Using your handheld with Palm Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Using your handheld with Microsoft Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Using your handheld with another PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Entering Data in Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the handheld keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Typing capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Typing numbers and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Navigation keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Using text ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Typing accented characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Typing extended characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Using the onscreen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Using your computer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Managing Your Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Applications Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Categorizing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing the Applications Launcher display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Choosing preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installing and removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installing add-on applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Removing Palm Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Working with expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Opening applications on an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copying applications to an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using the Card Info application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Assigning a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Changing or deleting a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Locking your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Recovering from a forgotten password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Applications Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Date Book Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CityTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Creating records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Other ways to delete records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Purging records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Categorizing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
System-defined and user-defined categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Page 4
Contents
Finding records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Looking up Contacts records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using Phone Number Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sorting lists of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Making records private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Hiding and masking private records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Attaching notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Choosing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Exchanging and updating data: HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Performing a HotSync operation for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Application-Specific Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Date Book Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Working in Day View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Scheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rescheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting an alarm for an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Scheduling repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing the Date Book Plus view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Working in Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Working in Week View with Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Working in Month View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Working in Year View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Working in List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Spotting event conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Working with floating events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Working with To Do items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using the Daily Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Date Book Plus menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Creating a Contacts entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Duplicating a Contacts entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Selecting types of phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Changing Contact entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Dialing a number in your Contacts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Contacts menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Setting priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Setting a due date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Assigning a category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Contents
Page 5
Checking off a To Do item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
To Do Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
To Do List menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Reviewing memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Memo Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
CityTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Setting your home city . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Selecting remote cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Adding cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
CityTime menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Selecting the Calculator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Using the Basic Calculator buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Displaying Recent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Using the Advanced Calculator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Using the Advanced Calculator buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Creating a custom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Calculator menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Changing the date of an Expense item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Entering receipt details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Customizing the Currency pick list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Transferring your data to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Expense menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Viewing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
HotSync Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Connection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Date & Time Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Digitizer Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Formats Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Country default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Auto-off delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
System, alarm, and game sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Page 6
Contents
Network Preferences and TCP/IP software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Selecting a service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Entering a user name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Entering a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Selecting a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Adding telephone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Connecting to your service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Creating additional service templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Adding detailed information to a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Creating a login script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Deleting a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Network Preferences menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
TCP/IP troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Owner Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Phone Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
ShortCuts Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Creating a ShortCut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Editing a ShortCut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Deleting a ShortCut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Advanced HotSync® Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Selecting HotSync setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Customizing HotSync application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
IR HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Preparing your computer for infrared communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Configuring HotSync Manager for infrared communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Performing an IR HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Returning to serial cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Conducting a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Preparing your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Preparing your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Performing a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Conducting a HotSync operation via a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Connecting to your company’s dial-in server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Performing a dial-in network HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Performing a network HotSync operation via a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Creating a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Synchronizing with your desktop e-mail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Preparing your computer to synchronize desktop e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Using Palm Mail on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Contents
Page 7
Viewing e-mail items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Creating e-mail items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Looking up an address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Adding details to e-mail items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Storing e-mail to be sent later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Filing e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Deleting e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Message list options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Sorting the Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Palm Mail HotSync options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Palm Mail menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Using the Wireless Application Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Preparing for mobile communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Blazer Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Viewing web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Working with bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Blazer menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Palm™ SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Receiving SMS messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Creating text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Creating a message signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Sending data via SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Modifying messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
SMS Messaging menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
One-Touch Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Maintaining Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Caring for your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Battery considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Resetting your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Performing a soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Performing a warm (or safe) reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Performing a hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Software installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Operating problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Tapping and keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Wireless communication problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
HotSync problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Beaming problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Page 8
Contents
Password problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Creating a Custom Expense Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
About mapping tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Customizing existing sample templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Determining the layout of the Expense Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Analyzing your custom Expense Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Programming the mapping table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Using applications other than Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Expense file details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Use of ^char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Carriage return and line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Literal characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Warranty and Other Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Product Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Handspring, Inc. End User Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
GNU Library General Public License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
FCC Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Canadian RFI Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Contents
Page 9
Page 10
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction to Your
Treo™ 90 Handheld
This chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on your Treo™ 90 handheld, how to use
your handheld for the first time, and how to install Palm™ Desktop software and the HotSync®
Manager synchronization software so you can synchronize your handheld and your computer.
Getting to know your handheld
What is a Treo handheld?
Your Treo handheld is one of the smallest, lightest, color Palm OS® handhelds available today.
With your new handheld, you will no longer have trouble getting to meetings and appointments
on time, remembering people’s names and personal details, or keeping track of all the items on
your to do list. Your handheld can help you improve your track record in all these areas, both at
work and at home.
You can enter all your schedule details in Date Book Plus so you can view them by the day, week,
month, year, or in list format; you can even set an alarm to remind you of important meetings. Keep
all your contact names, addresses, phone numbers, and other details in Contacts, so you can find
them as soon as you need them. Add your tasks to To Do list, prioritize them so you don’t overlook
them, and assign them a due date.
To make sure you don’t lose any of this important information, you can synchronize your data with
Palm Desktop software on your computer so you always have a backup copy. You can set
different levels of security for your handheld so unauthorized eyes cannot view your data.
When you are out of the office, track your expenses for your expense reports; then transfer the
data to your computer to print it out. Using the IR port or a cable to connect to your data-enabled
mobile phone, you can dial your ISP and use the included Wireless Application Suite to send and
receive e-mail, exchange SMS text messages, and to browse the Internet. Alternatively you can
write, edit, and view your e-mail, and then use Palm Mail to synchronize your e-mail with your
desktop e-mail application when you return to your office.
Using your handheld doesn’t always have to be serious either. With the bright color screen and
expansion capabilities, you can enjoy viewing photos and playing games without worrying about
running out of storage space.
Chapter 1
Page 11
System requirements
To install and operate Palm Desktop software and the HotSync Manager synchronization
software, your computer system must meet the following requirements:
Minimum requirements
■
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP with USB port,
(for USB HotSync® cable)
--or-Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0
with serial port (for serial HotSync cable)
■
32 MB RAM (memory)
■
25 MB available hard disk space
■
VGA monitor or better
■
CD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software from www.handspring.com)
■
Internet Explorer 5.01 or higher (recommended)
Upgrade information
If you already own a Palm OS handheld, Handspring recommends that you install the version of
Palm Desktop software that comes with your Treo handheld into the same folder as your current
Palm Desktop software. When you install the new version in the same folder as the previous
version, all your data is preserved. If you use another personal information manager (PIM), you still
need to install Palm Desktop software in order to update the HotSync Manager on your computer.
You perform HotSync operations in exactly the same way, so you can quickly synchronize your
old data with your new handheld.
Note:
If you used password protection on your old handheld, you must upgrade to the most
current desktop. The method of storing passwords has changed with the latest release
of the desktop. Therefore, your password-protected information will not be synchronized
if you don’t upgrade.
To upgrade:
1. Synchronize your old handheld with your old Palm Desktop software. This ensures that the
latest information from your handheld is on your desktop computer.
2. (Optional) To ensure against any data loss, go to the folder that stores Palm Desktop
software (this is usually the Handspring or Palm folder), copy (do not move) your user name
folder, and store the copy outside the Palm Desktop software folder.
3. Follow the installation instructions that begin on page 24. Be sure to install the new software
in the same folder as the old software.
4. Connect your new handheld to the HotSync cable and press the HotSync button on the cable.
If the Select User dialog box appears, select your user name.
Page 12
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
5. If you had important settings on your old handheld, such as Network Preferences or
Connection Preferences, manually copy them from your old handheld to your new handheld.
6. Compare the applications on your old handheld and your new handheld.
7. Beam any third party applications that did not transfer from your old handheld to your new
handheld, or install them from the original files.
8. If any data for your third party applications did not transfer, beam it from your old handheld to
your new handheld.
9. If you created a password on your old handheld, enter it on your new handheld.
Note:
Records you previously marked Private remain marked Private, but you need to
reenter a password on your new handheld.
Each device must have a unique name
After you complete the upgrade process described above, you have two devices with the same
name. This is an undesirable situation. Each device must have a unique name in order to prevent
unexpected results during HotSync operations and other complications.
We strongly recommend that you perform a hard reset on your old handheld. See page 215 for
details.
A hard reset not only erases all data from the old handheld; it also erases the name and makes
that handheld a clean slate, ready to receive a new name. The next time you perform a HotSync
operation with this old handheld, you are asked to give it a name. Be sure to give it a unique name.
Chapter 1
Page 13
Treo components
Locating front panel controls
Screen
Lanyard holder
Keyboard
Contrast/
Brightness control
Application
buttons
Scroll buttons
Lanyard holder
Enables you to attach a lanyard to your handheld so that it’s easy to carry.
Contrast/
Brightness
Control
Opens the Adjust Display dialog box where you can adjust the appearance
of your handheld screen for the clearest screen display. See page 16 for
instructions.
Scroll buttons
Displays text and other information that extends beyond the area of the
handheld screen. Pressing the bottom scroll button scrolls down to view
information below the viewing area, and pressing the top scroll button
scrolls up to view the information above the viewing area.
Page 14
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Application
buttons
Activates the applications that correspond to the icons on the buttons:
Date Book Plus, Contacts, To Do List, and Memo Pad. See page 138 for
details on reassigning these buttons to activate any application on your
handheld.
You can also use these buttons in combination with Option
other applications. See Chapter 4 in this guide for details.
Tip:
to activate
If your handheld is turned off, pressing any application button turns
on your handheld and opens the corresponding application.
Keyboard
Enables you to type letters, numbers and symbols on your handheld. See
Chapter 2 to learn how to enter information.
Handheld
screen
Displays the applications and information stored in your handheld. It is
touch-sensitive and responds to the stylus.
Locating back panel controls
Connector
Reset
button
Power button/LED
Expansion slot
IR port
Stylus
Power
button/
LED
Turns your handheld on and off, locks and unlocks the keyboard, and indicates
the status of the battery as it charges.
When your handheld is connected to the travel charger or HotSync cable, the
LED blinks while the battery charges and stays on after the battery is charged.
When the LED alarm setting is active, the LED blinks as an alarm notification.
See page 142 for details.
Expansion
slot
Insert optional Secure Digital (SD) cards or MultiMedia Cards (MMC) to add
features to your handheld. See the section that begins on page 44 for
information about how to use expansion cards.
Stylus
Serves as the instrument used to tap options on your handheld screen. To use
the stylus, slide the stylus out of the slot, and hold it as you would a pen or
pencil.
IR port
Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data from other Palm
OS devices. See the section that begins on page 78 for details. You can also
use the IR port to update the information between your handheld and computer
using HotSync technology. See the section that begins on page 160 for details.
Chapter 1
Page 15
Reset button
Under normal use, you should not have to use the reset button. See Appendix
A for information about when and how to use the reset button.
Connector
Enables you to connect your handheld to the travel charger, HotSync cable, and
other devices such as a mobile phone. The HotSync cable connects to a USB
port or serial port on your computer and enables you to synchronize the
information between your handheld and computer using HotSync technology.
Locking and unlocking the keyboard
To avoid accidentally pressing keys while your handheld is in your pocket, purse, etc., you can lock
the keyboard. Locking the keyboard helps conserve battery power, and prevents unintentional
creation and deletion of records. When the keyboard is locked, you cannot enter data or view
information on your handheld until you unlock the keyboard.
To lock the keyboard:
■
Press and hold the power button for two seconds.
To unlock the keyboard:
1. Press and hold the power button for two seconds.
2. In the KeyLock Off dialog box, tap OK to unlock the keyboard.
Adjusting the display
Depending on the lighting conditions or temperature of the environment where you use your
handheld, you may need to adjust the brightness and color saturation of the display.
The Adjust Display dialog box contains two sliders. The upper slider adjusts color saturation and
the lower slider adjusts brightness. The display usually looks best at maximum brightness but you
may want to decrease the brightness to conserve battery power.
To adjust the display:
1. Press Option
.
2. Type the letter Q.
3. Press the scroll buttons, or drag the top slider, to adjust the color saturation until you can see
the three shapes as distinctly as possible.
4. Hold Option
brightness
Tip:
You can also tap to the left or right of the sliders to fine tune the display settings.
5. Hold Option
Page 16
and press the scroll buttons, or drag the bottom slider, to adjust the screen
and press Return
to finish.
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Charging the battery
To use your handheld, you must connect the travel charger or the HotSync cable and charge the
battery. When you’re near your computer, connect your handheld to the HotSync cable with the
travel charger connected to a wall outlet as shown in the section that begins on page 23. When
travelling, connect the travel charger cable directly to your handheld as shown in this section.
It takes about 90 minutes to charge the battery. A fully charged battery provides approximately
10 days of use. If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not turn on, it stores
your data safely for about three days.
Note:
Recharge the battery after the first low battery warning. This prevents data loss that can
occur if your handheld sits idle for more than five days after the first battery warning. See
Appendix A for tips on extending the life of the battery.
To charge the battery with the travel charger:
1. Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet.
2. With the word “UP” facing up (as shown), connect the travel charger cable to the charger
connector on the bottom of your handheld.
LED
Tip:
The LED blinks green while your handheld charges. When the LED turns solid green, your
handheld is charged. It takes approximately 90 minutes to charge a fully drained battery.
Chapter 1
Page 17
Using the protective cover
The cover protects the handheld screen when it is not in use.
To remove the cover:
1. Unclip the top of the cover from your handheld.
2. Lift the cover off your handheld.
To reattach the cover:
1. Insert the pegs on the cover into the holes on the top of the sides of your handheld.
2. Gently press the top of the cover onto your handheld until it clicks into place.
Page 18
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Using the stylus to get things done
Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen, using the stylus to tap elements on
your handheld screen is a way to get things done on your handheld.
The first time you start your handheld, setup instructions appear on the screen. These instructions
include a calibration screen, or digitizer. Calibration aligns the internal circuitry of your handheld
with its touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen, the handheld can
detect exactly which task you want to perform.
Important:
Always use the point of the stylus for tapping the handheld screen. Never use an
actual pen, pencil, or other sharp object to tap the handheld screen.
With your handheld turned on, you can tap the handheld screen to perform many operations, such
as the following:
■
Open applications
■
Choose menu commands
■
Select options in dialog boxes
Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your computer, you can also
drag the stylus to select text. You can also use the stylus to drag the slider of any scroll bar.
Elements of the handheld interface
Menu bar
Pick list
Check box
Command buttons
Menu bar
A set of commands that are specific to the application. Not all applications have
a menu bar.
Command Tap a button to perform a command. Command buttons appear in dialog boxes
buttons
and at the bottom of application screens.
Check box When a check mark appears in a check box, the corresponding option is active. If
a check box is empty, tapping it inserts a check mark. If a check box is checked,
tapping it removes the check mark.
Pick list
Chapter 1
Tap the arrow to display a list of choices, and then tap an item in the list to select it.
Page 19
Slider
Previous/next
arrows
Scroll
bar
Previous/
next arrows
Tap the up and down arrows to display the previous and next page of
information; tap the left and right arrows to display the previous and next record.
Scroll bar
Press the scroll buttons on the front panel of your handheld to scroll to the
previous and next pages. To scroll the display one line at a time, tap the top or
bottom arrow.
You can also scroll by dragging the slider or by tapping the scroll bar just above
or below the slider to scroll to the previous or next page.
Moving around the screen
You can move between entry fields, pick lists, check boxes, and other options by using the stylus,
or the scroll buttons.
To move around the screen do one of the following:
■
Tap an item with the stylus.
■
Press the scroll buttons to scroll through the items on the screen.
Tip:
To learn how to move around the screen using the Treo keyboard, see page 33.
Displaying online tips
Many of the dialog boxes that appear on your handheld contain an online Tips icon in the upperright corner. Online tips anticipate questions you have in a dialog box, provide shortcuts for using
the dialog box, or give you other useful information.
To display an online tip:
1. Tap the Tips icon
.
2. After you review the tip, hold Option
Page 20
and press Return
to finish.
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Customizing your handheld
You can customize your handheld by using the Preferences application. You can enter personal
information such as your name and address; change the time and date; view different date and
time formats when you travel; turn off sounds, and configure your handheld to work with a modem
or network. See Chapter 7 for more information on customizing your handheld.
To open the Preferences screens:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Tap the Preferences icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
4. Tap the Preferences category you want to view.
The following procedures for setting the time and date give you an example of how to customize
your handheld using the Date & Time Preferences.
To set the current time:
1. Tap the Set Time box.
Tap here
2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
3. Tap each minute number, and then tap the arrows to change them.
4. Tap AM or PM.
Note:
Your handheld can also display time based on a 24-hour clock. See page 140 for
details.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 1
and press Return
to finish.
Page 21
To set the current date:
1. Tap the Set Date box.
Tap arrows to
select year
Tap here
Tap to select month
Tap to select date
2. Hold Option
3. Hold Shift
and press a scroll button to scroll to the current year.
and press a scroll button to scroll to the current month.
4. Type the number for the current date.
5. Press Space
Tip:
to select the date.
You can also select the date by tapping the screen as shown above.
To set the time zone:
1. Tap the Set Time Zone box.
Tap to select
time zone
Tap here
2. Press the scroll buttons or tap the arrows to scroll to your country and time zone.
Tip:
Choose the time zone that corresponds to where you are. When you travel, use this
dialog box to change time zones. If you’re not sure what time zone you are in, find out
what time it is, and select the time zone which shows the correct New Time. Do not
use the time zone dialog to switch between daylight savings time and standard time.
Use the Daylight Savings pick list.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To set the daylight savings time:
■
Tap the Daylight Savings pick list to toggle this feature on and off.
Page 22
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Connecting the HotSync cable
The HotSync cable that comes with your Treo enables you to charge your handheld battery and
to synchronize the information on your handheld using HotSync technology.
Note:
If your computer does not have a USB port, or it uses Windows 95 or Windows NT, you
need a serial HotSync cable to connect to your computer. You can purchase a serial
HotSync cable from www.handspring.com.
To connect the HotSync cable:
1. Connect the travel charger cable to the short end of the Hotsync cable. Be sure to match the
sides of the connectors labeled “UP.”
2. Connect the USB HotSync cable to a USB port on your computer, or connect the Serial
HotSync cable to a Serial port on your computer.
3. Connect the long end of the HotSync cable to your handheld with the button facing up.
USB cable and port
Serial cable and port
Chapter 1
Page 23
Note:
If you are unsure about the exact location of the USB port or serial port on your computer,
refer to the manual supplied with the computer.
4. Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet.
Tip:
The travel charger does not need to be plugged into a wall outlet to perform a HotSync
operation. However, if you want to use the HotSync cable to charge your Treo handheld,
you must plug the travel charger into a wall outlet.
Using desktop software
When you use desktop software with HotSync technology, you can do any of the following:
■
Work with your handheld applications on your computer. Most desktop software applications
duplicate many of the applications on your handheld, so you can view, enter, and modify most
of the data stored on your handheld.
■
Back up and synchronize data between your handheld and your computer. Synchronization is
a one-step procedure that ensures that changes you make on your handheld or desktop
software appear in both places. See the section that begins on page 76 for details.
■
Import and export data, so you can easily transfer data from other desktop applications into
many of your applications. See the section that begins on page 34 for details.
■
Print data from your desktop software on any printer.
Using your handheld with Palm Desktop software
Your handheld comes with Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software includes many of the
same applications as your handheld: Date Book, Address (Contacts), To Do List, Memo Pad,
Expense, and desktop e-mail connectivity.
The following instructions guide you through installing Palm Desktop software. After installation,
refer to the online Help in Palm Desktop software for information about how to use the software.
Note:
You must install the software that comes with your Treo handheld even if you already
installed Palm Desktop software for a previous Palm OS handheld.
To ensure a safe and uninterrupted installation of Palm Desktop software, please do not simply
copy the Palm Desktop software files to your computer’s hard disk. You must use the installer to
place the files in their proper locations and to decompress the files.
To install Palm Desktop software:
1. Connect the HotSync cable. See page 23 for instructions.
2. Exit any open programs, including those that run at startup such as Microsoft Office, and
disable any virus-scanning software.
3. Insert the Handspring CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4. If the language selection screen appears, click the same language you selected on your
handheld. Choosing a different language may result in loss of data.
Page 24
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.
6. If you have a data-enabled mobile phone with an IR port, or a special cable that connects to
your handheld, complete the next part of the installation to install the Wireless Application
Suite and configure your Treo for wireless data communication, otherwise skip this step.
When the set up process is done, the installation screen closes automatically.
Using your handheld with Microsoft Outlook
The software that comes with your Treo handheld includes everything you need to synchronize
your handheld with Microsoft Outlook. If you already have Microsoft Outlook installed on your
computer, the installation program prompts you to choose the Microsoft Outlook synchronization
option.
Using your handheld with another PIM
If you prefer to use another personal information manager (PIM), such as Lotus Notes, you can
use it if third-party connection software, called a conduit, is available for your PIM. You must install
the software that came with your Treo handheld along with the conduit for your PIM to
synchronize the data between your handheld and your PIM. For information on conduit software,
go to this web site: www.handspring.com.
Chapter 1
Page 25
Page 26
Introduction to Your Treo™ 90 Handheld
Chapter 2
Entering Data in Your Handheld
This chapter explains how to enter data into your Treo™ 90 handheld using each of the following
methods:
■
Using the handheld keyboard
■
Using the onscreen keyboard
■
Using your computer keyboard
■
Importing data
Using the handheld keyboard
The handheld keyboard is the primary method you’ll use to enter data into your handheld. Each
letter key on the keyboard has three functions:
Normal: Types a lowercase letter.
Shift:
Types an uppercase letter.
Option: Types the number/symbol, or activates the function, that appears in blue on the key.
@
W
Q
%
A
Option
S
Z
(
:
Shift/Find
Space
E
$
D
X
)
R
F
C
/
–
T
*
+
G
V
Y
H
B
1
4
7
U
2
5
J
N
8
0
...
I
K
3
#
O
6
L'
9
.
M
P"
Backspace
Return
Menu/
Applications
ListType
Typing capital letters
To type capital letters, you must first “shift” to caps and then type the character.
Note:
Your handheld includes a feature that automatically capitalizes the first letter when you
create a new sentence or a new record (by tapping New or a blank line).
Chapter 2
Page 27
To type a single capital letter (Caps Shift):
1. Press Shift
:
When Caps Shift is active, an “up arrow” symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the Treo
screen. If you accidentally activate Caps Shift, press Shift
twice to cancel it, or if you do
nothing for five seconds, it reverts to lowercase.
Caps Shift
2. Type the letter you want to capitalize.
To enter only capital letters (Caps Lock):
1. Press Shift
twice.
When Caps Lock is active, an underlined “up arrow” symbol appears in the lower-right corner
of the handheld screen.
Caps Lock
2. Type the text you want to capitalize.
3. Press Shift
to turn off Caps Lock.
Typing numbers and symbols
Typing numbers and symbols with your handheld is similar to typing symbols on a computer
keyboard. You must first “shift” to option mode and then type the number or symbol strokes.
To enter a single number or symbol (Option Shift):
1. Press Option
.
When Option Shift is active, a dot appears in the lower-right corner of the Treo screen. If you
accidentally activate Option Shift, press Backspace
to cancel it.
Option Shift
2. Press the key where the number or symbol appears in blue.
To enter only numbers or symbols (Option Lock):
1. Press Option
twice.
2. Press the keys where the numbers or symbols appear in blue.
When Option Lock is active, an underlined dot appears in the lower-right corner of the Treo
screen.
Option Lock
3. Press Option
Page 28
to turn off Option Lock.
Entering Data in Your Handheld
Navigation keystrokes
In addition to character symbols, your handheld includes special keystrokes that you can use to
navigate within text or fields in your applications.
Note:
Some applications may not support these navigation keystrokes.
Command
Keystrokes
Move cursor right
Hold Option
while pressing the bottom scroll button.
Move cursor left
Hold Option
while pressing the top scroll button.
Previous field
Press the top scroll button.
Next field
Press the bottom scroll button.
Affirm an action
Hold Option
and press Return . Use these keys instead of tapping
the following onscreen buttons: OK, Done, Yes, Next, Accept, Send, and
Dial.
Annul an action
Hold Option
and press Backspace
. Use these keys instead of
tapping the following onscreen buttons: Cancel, No, Previous, and
Reject.
Open or dial the
selected item
Press Space
or press Return
.
Using menus
Menus on your handheld are easy to use. Once you have mastered them in one application, you
can use them the same way in all other applications.
The menus and menu commands that are available depend on the application. Also, the menus
and menu commands vary depending on which part of the application you’re using. For example,
in Memo Pad, the menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo edit screen.
The menus of each application are illustrated in the section on that application in Chapter 6. The
Edit menu is described in the section that begins on page 62.
To use the menu bar:
1. Open an application (such as Memo Pad).
2. Press Menu
Tip:
Chapter 2
to open the menu bar.
You can also open the menu bar by tapping the inverted tab at the top of any
application’s screen (except Calculator).
Page 29
Inverted
tab
In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit, and Options. The Record menu is
selected and contains the commands New Memo, Delete Memo, and Beam Memo.
3. Press the top scroll button to switch between menus.
4. Press the bottom scroll button to select a command within a menu.
5. Press Space
Tip:
to run the selected command.
To close the menus without running a command, press Menu
again.
Keyboard shortcut menu commands
Most menu commands have an equivalent keyboard shortcut. The shortcut letters appear to the
right of the menu command names. Throughout this guide, the shortcut letters appear in
parentheses (/C) next to menu selection instructions.
Menu commands
Shortcut letters
To use keyboard shortcuts for menu commands:
1. Press Menu
to open the menu bar.
2. Type the menu command shortcut letter.
For example, to choose Copy in the Edit menu, press Menu
Tip:
followed by the letter “c.”
When the menu bar is open, you can enter a shortcut letter for any menu item in the
current application view, not just the ones that appear on the current menu.
Using text ShortCuts
ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy. ShortCuts are similar
to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word processors.
Your handheld comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create your own. Each
ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you might create a ShortCut for your
name, or for the header of a memo. See the section that begins on page 154 to learn about
creating your own ShortCuts.
Page 30
Entering Data in Your Handheld
Your handheld includes the following predefined ShortCuts:
Entry
ShortCut
Date stamp
ds
Time stamp
ts
Date / time stamp
dts
Meeting
me
Breakfast
br
Lunch
lu
Dinner
di
To use a ShortCut:
1. Type the letter s.
2. Press ListType
.
3. Use the scroll buttons to select the ShortCut symbol
Note:
.
The ShortCut symbol appears by the cursor to show that you are in ShortCut mode.
4. Type the ShortCut characters.
Typing accented characters
The ListType feature enables you to enter accented characters. You can enter the following
accented letters:
à á ä â ã å çè é ë ê ì í ï î ñ ò ó ö ô õ ù ú ü û ý ÿ
To enter accented characters:
1. Type the letter (uppercase or lowercase) to which you want to add an accent.
2. Press ListType
.
3. Use the scroll buttons to select the accent you want to apply.
4. Press Space
Tip:
to insert the accented character.
You can also select the accented character you want to insert by repeatedly pressing
ListType
.
Typing extended characters
The ListType feature also enables you to enter many extended characters that are not on the
keyboard, such as currency symbols and emoticons. Extended characters are often found under
related characters. For example, the £ symbol is located under $.
Chapter 2
Page 31
To enter extended characters:
1. Position the cursor where you want to insert the extended character.
2. Type the base character associated with the extended character you want to insert:
Tip:
To view a list of available accented and symbol characters, press Menu
under Edit select Keyboard Help (/G).
Base
character
Symbols
Base
character
Symbols
Base
character
and
Symbols
a
æ
O
Ø
.
?!…
A
Æ
p
¶
,
‚‚‚
b
ß
P
¶
!
¡
B
ß
r
®
?
¿
c
¢©^ˆ
R
®
:
; :-) :-( ;-)
:-D
C
¢©^ˆ
s
ßš§
'
‘’‹›~`
d
†‡
S
ߊ§
"
“”«»
D
†‡Ð
t
~™†‡
$
£¥
e
T
~™†‡
+
&
E
x
×
-
_~•–—
f
ƒ
X
×
/
\÷¦
F
ƒ
y
¥
%
‰
l
£
Y
¥
#
=
L
£
0
‰º
(
<[{‹
m
µ
1
¹¼½
)
>]}›
M
µ
2
²
o
ø
3
³
3. Press ListType
.
4. Use the scroll buttons to select the extended symbol you want to insert.
5. Press Space
Tip:
Page 32
to insert the extended character.
To enter a tab, press Shift
and then press Space
.
Entering Data in Your Handheld
Using the onscreen keyboard
You can open the onscreen keyboard anytime you need to enter text or numbers on your
handheld. When used in conjunction with the backlight, the onscreen keyboard is especially
useful for typing in the dark.
To use the onscreen keyboard:
1. Open a record in an application that requires you to enter data (such as Memo Pad).
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Edit, select Keyboard (/K).
4. Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and international characters.
Tab
Backspace
Caps lock
Carriage return
Caps shift
Tap here to display
alphabetic keyboard
Tap here to display
numeric keyboard
Note:
Tap here to display
international keyboard
The onscreen keyboard also includes a dialog box for international characters. You
can switch among the three dialogs at any time to enter the exact text you need.
5. After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in the record.
Using your computer keyboard
Many of the applications on your handheld are available in Palm Desktop software and in most
Personal Information Manager (PIM) applications. If you have a lot of data to enter, or prefer to
use the computer keyboard, you can use Palm™ Desktop software, or any supported PIM such
as Microsoft Outlook, to enter information. You can then perform a HotSync® operation to
synchronize the information on your computer with the information on your handheld. See the
section that begins on page 76 for details on HotSync operations.
Refer to Palm Desktop online Help or the documentation that came with your PIM software for
more information on entering data on your computer.
Chapter 2
Page 33
Importing data
If you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets and databases, or if you
want to import data from another Palm OS® handheld, you can transfer the data to your handheld
without having to key it in manually. Save the data in one of the file formats listed below, import
it into Palm Desktop software, and then perform a HotSync operation to transfer the data to your
handheld.
Palm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats:
■
Comma delimited (.csv, .txt): Address and Memo Pad only
■
Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt): Address and Memo Pad only
■
CSV (Lotus Organizer 2.x/97 Mapping): Address only
■
vCal (.vcs) Date Book only
■
vCard (.vcf) Address only
■
Date Book archive (.dba)
■
Address archive (.aba)
■
To Do List archive (.tda)
■
Memo Pad archive (.mpa)
Archive formats can only be used with Palm Desktop software. Use the archive file formats to
share information with other people who use Palm OS handhelds or to create a copy of your
important Palm Desktop information.
To import data:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. Click the application into which you want to import data.
3. If you are importing records containing a field with category names, select All in the Category
box.
Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also exist in the application.
If the categories do not exist, create them now; otherwise, the records are imported into the
Unfiled category.
4. From the File menu, select Import.
5. Select the file you want to import.
6. Click Open.
7. To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields, drag fields in the left-hand column so
that they are opposite the corresponding imported field on the right.
8. If you do not want to import a field, deselect the check box for that field.
Page 34
Entering Data in Your Handheld
9. Click OK.
The imported data is highlighted in the application.
10. To add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.
See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting data.
Chapter 2
Page 35
Page 36
Entering Data in Your Handheld
Chapter 3
Managing Your Applications
This chapter explains how to switch between applications on your Treo™ 90 handheld, how to
change application settings so they are personalized to your work methods, and how to categorize
applications so you view them in related groups.
Using the Applications Launcher
Your handheld is equipped with a variety of applications. All the applications installed on your
handheld appear in the Applications Launcher.
Opening applications
You can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on your handheld. You
can also open the four main applications — Date Book Plus, Contacts, To Do List, and Memo Pad
— with the application buttons on the front panel of your handheld.
Tip:
When you press an application button on the front panel of your handheld, you have
instant access to the selected application. You don’t even need to turn on your handheld
first.
In addition to providing a way for you to open applications, the Applications Launcher displays the
current time, battery level, and application category.
To open an application:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Press the scroll buttons to select the application you want to open.
3. Press Space
Tip:
or press Return
to launch the application.
You can also tap the icon of the application that you want to open. To find an application
quickly, you can type the first few letters of its name. The Applications Launcher scrolls
to the first application with a name that begins with those letters. You can also create
categories and organize your applications by category. See page 38 for details.
Chapter 3
Page 37
Switching between applications
When working in any application, press Option
and then press Menu
, or press an
application button on the front panel of your handheld to switch to another application. Your
handheld automatically saves your work in the current application and displays it when you return
to that application.
Categorizing applications
The category feature enables you to manage the number of application icons that appear
onscreen in the Applications Launcher. You can assign an application to a category and then
display a single category or all your applications.
To categorize an application:
1. Press Option
2. Press Menu
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
again to open the menus.
3. Under App, select Category (/Y).
4. Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category.
Tip:
To create a new category, tap Edit Categories from the pick list. Tap New, enter the
category name. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to add the category.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To display applications by category:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Do one of the following:
■
Hold Option
and press Menu
repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.
■
Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen and select the category you want
to display.
Changing the Applications Launcher display
By default, the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you
can choose to show a list of applications. You can also choose to view the same category of
applications each time you open the Applications Launcher.
Page 38
Managing Your Applications
To change the Applications Launcher display:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
again to open the menus.
3. Under Options, select Preferences(/R).
4. Tap the View By pick list and select List.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
again to open the menus.
3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R).
4. Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Choosing preferences
You can set options that affect an entire application in the application’s Preferences dialog box.
To change preferences for an application:
1. Open an application.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R).
Note:
Not all applications have a Preferences command.
4. Make changes to the settings.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 3
and press Return
to finish.
Page 39
Installing and removing applications
This section explains how to install and remove applications on your handheld and how to remove
Palm™ Desktop software from your computer.
Installing add-on applications
Your handheld comes with the Contacts, Date Book Plus, To Do List, Memo Pad, Expense,
Calculator, CityTime, and Palm Mail applications installed and ready to use. The Handspring CDROM also includes a wireless application suite which you can install from the CD-ROM if you want
to configure your handheld for wireless communication.
You can also install additional applications on your handheld, such as business applications,
games, and other software. The Install Tool makes it easy to install software on your handheld
during a HotSync® operation. There are a variety of third-party applications available for devices
that use Palm OS software. To learn more about these applications, go to the web site:
www.handspring.com.
When you download an add-on application from the Internet, it is probably in a compressed format
such as a .zip or .sit file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on your
computer, to decompress the .prc and .pdb files inside the compressed file. A trial version of the
PKZIP decompression utility is located on your computer in the Programs\Handspring\Utility
folder. If you need a different decompression utility, search the Internet using phrases like 'zip
decompression' or 'how to unzip'. This will lead you to various third-party utilities that you can use
to decompress any kind of compressed or downloaded file--not just add-ons for your handheld.
After you install the utility, you are ready to decompress the add-on application files that you
downloaded.
Note:
Any applications that you install on your handheld resides in RAM memory; you can delete
them at any time.
To install add-on software on your handheld:
1. Copy or download the application you want to install into the add-on folder in your Handspring
(or Palm) directory on your computer.
Note:
If the software you download is compressed, you need to decompress it into this
folder. If you prefer to place the application into another folder, you need to navigate
to that folder before you complete step 5.
2. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your desktop.
Page 40
Managing Your Applications
3. Click Install.
Tip:
You can also access the Install Tool dialog box by selecting Install Tool under
Handspring on the Start menu, or by double-clicking any file with a PRC file
extension.
4. In the User drop-down list, select the name that corresponds to your handheld.
5. Click Add.
Chapter 3
Page 41
6. Select the application(s) that you want to install on your handheld.
7. Click Open.
Note:
Review the list of applications you selected in the Install Tool dialog box. If you do not
want to install an application, select it, and then click Remove. (This does not remove
the application from your computer; it simply removes it from the list of applications
to install.)
8. If you want to install the application(s) on an expansion card, click Change Destination, click
the arrows to move the application(s) to the expansion card pane, and then click OK.
Note:
Before you install an application on an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible
with Palm OS version 4.0. Older applications may not work properly when installed
on an expansion card.
9. Click Done.
10. Perform a HotSync operation to install the application(s) you selected in step 6. See the
section that begins on page 76 for details.
Tip:
You can also install an application by simply double-clicking the application’s icon.
Removing applications
In the event that you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you
installed, you can remove applications from your handheld. You can remove only add-on
applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications that
reside in the ROM portion of your handheld.
To remove an add-on application:
1. Press Option
2. Press Menu
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
again to open the menus.
3. Under App, select Delete (/D).
4. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, tap the Delete From pick list
and select the card name.
Page 42
Managing Your Applications
Note:
To delete an application from an expansion card, you must first insert the card into
your handheld. See page 44 for details.
5. Tap the application that you want to remove.
6. Tap Delete.
7. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to finish.
8. Check the Backup folder in the Palm Desktop folder on your computer. If you find a PRC file
for the application you just removed, delete the PRC file from the Backup folder.
Tip:
If you installed Palm Desktop software for the first time when you purchased your
Treo handheld, the Palm Desktop software is located in the Handspring folder. If you
upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop software, these files are most
likely located in the Palm folder.
Removing Palm Desktop software
Removing Palm Desktop software also removes HotSync Manager. If you remove this software
from your computer, you cannot synchronize your data. So, we highly recommend leaving Palm
Desktop software on your computer.
To remove Palm Desktop software:
1. From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs, Handspring (or Palm) and then Uninstall.
2. Click Yes to uninstall the software.
Chapter 3
Page 43
Working with expansion cards
The expansion slot on your handheld enables you to add Secure Digital (SD) cards and
MultiMedia Cards (MMC) that extend the functionality and storage capacity of your handheld.
Your Treo comes with a mock, non-functional card inside the expansion slot. When you do not
have a functioning card inside the expansion slot, reinsert the mock card to protect the slot
opening.
To insert and remove an expansion card:
1. Press down and release the mock card.
2. After you feel the expansion slot eject the mock card, remove the card from the expansion
slot.
3. Hold the card so it is facing in the same direction as the card icon on the back of your
handheld.
4. Insert the card into the expansion slot until you feel the card lock into place and hear the
confirmation tone.
5. When you’re done using the expansion card, repeat steps 1 and 2 to remove the expansion
card.
6. Reinsert the mock card to keep the expansion slot clean.
Page 44
Managing Your Applications
Opening applications on an expansion card
After you insert an expansion card in the expansion slot, you can open any of the applications
stored on the expansion card.
To open an application on an expansion card:
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion slot as described in the previous section.
The Applications Launcher automatically displays its contents.
2. Press the scroll buttons to select the icon associated with the application you want to open.
Tip:
To switch between the applications on the expansion card and your handheld, tap the
category pick list in the upper-right corner and select another category. When you insert
an expansion card, the card name appears as a new category with a card icon next to the
name. This enables you to easily switch between applications on your handheld and the
expansion card.
3. Press Space
or press Return
to launch the application.
Copying applications to an expansion card
You can copy applications between your handheld and your expansion card.
Note:
Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible
with Palm OS version 4.0. Older applications may not work properly when used on an
expansion card.
To copy an application to an expansion card:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Press Menu
again to open the menus.
3. Under App, select Copy (/C).
Chapter 3
Page 45
4. Tap the Copy To pick list and select the destination: card name, or Handheld.
5. Tap the From pick list and select the location of the application you want to copy: card name,
or Handheld.
6. Tap the application you want to copy.
7. Tap Copy.
Using the Card Info application
The Card Info application displays general information about the expansion card that is currently
in the expansion slot and it enables you to rename and format a card.
To view expansion card information:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Press the scroll buttons to select the Card Info icon
3. Press Space
or press Return
.
to launch the application.
Card name
Card content
summary
Page 46
Managing Your Applications
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the card
to better match it’s contents.
To rename an expansion card:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Card, select Rename Card (/R).
3. Enter the new name for the card.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Formatting an expansion card
When you format an expansion card, you erase all the data stored on the card and prepare it to
a blank state. Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a diskette on a computer.
To format an expansion card:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Card, select Format Card (/F).
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Security
Your handheld comes with a Security application so that unauthorized users cannot view the
entries you wish to protect.
In Security, you can do the following:
■
Mask or hide entries you define as private. The Mask option displays a gray bar over private
records, and the Hide option completely removes (hides) private records. See the section that
begins on page 73 for more information.
■
Assign a password to the Security viewing options. Assigning a password requires you to
enter a password to view masked or hidden private entries; not assigning a password enables
you (or anyone else) to view individual masked private entries by tapping them, and to view
all hidden or masked private entries by selecting Show Records in the Security dialog box.
■
Lock and turn off your handheld so that it does not operate until you enter the correct
password.
Chapter 3
Page 47
Assigning a password
You can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock your handheld.
To assign a password:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Tap the Security icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Tap the Password box.
4. Enter a password.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
.
Tap here
6. Enter the same password a second time.
7. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Changing or deleting a password
Once you define a password for your handheld, you can change or delete it at any time. You must
enter the current password before you can change or delete it.
To change or delete your password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Enter the current password.
Tap here
3. Hold Option
Page 48
and press Return
.
Managing Your Applications
4. Do one of the following:
■
To change the password, enter the new password, and hold Option
Return
.
■
To delete the password, tap Unassign.
and press
Locking your handheld
You can also lock your handheld so that you need to enter your password to operate it. There are
two ways to lock your handheld: manually and automatically.
Important:
If you lock your handheld, you must enter the exact password to re-activate your
handheld. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume
using your handheld. Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your
handheld; however, you can restore all previously synchronized data at the next
HotSync operation. See page 215 for details.
To lock your handheld manually:
1. Assign a password.
2. Tap Lock & Turn Off.
Tap Lock &
Turn Off
3. Tap Off & Lock.
4. To start your handheld, turn it on, and then enter the password.
Chapter 3
Page 49
To lock your handheld automatically:
1. Assign a password.
2. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
3. When prompted, enter your password.
Tap here
4. Tap one of the following options:
Never
Prevents your handheld from locking automatically.
On power off
Locks your handheld when you turn it off, or when it shuts off with
the auto-off feature.
At a preset time
Locks your handheld at a specific time of day. If you choose this
option, the Set Time dialog box appears for you to specify when you
want your handheld to lock.
After a preset delay
Locks your handheld after a period of inactivity. If you choose this
option, the minutes field appears for you to specify the number of
minutes after which you want your handheld to lock.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
6. To start your handheld, turn it on, and then enter the password.
Recovering from a forgotten password
If you lock your handheld and you forget your password, you can delete the password from your
handheld. Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries and files marked as Private.
Important:
Page 50
If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a forgotten password, your
handheld restores your private entries the next time you perform a HotSync
operation, but it does not restore the password.
Managing Your Applications
To delete a forgotten password:
1. Tap the Password box.
Tap here
2. Tap Lost Password.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 3
and press Return
for Yes.
Page 51
Page 52
Managing Your Applications
Chapter 4
Applications Overview
This chapter briefly describes each application and how to open it. Your Treo™ 90 handheld
comes with these applications already installed:
■
Date Book Plus
■
Contacts
■
To Do List
■
Memo Pad
■
CityTime
■
Calculator
■
Expense
Chapter 4
Page 53
Date Book Plus
Date Book Plus lets you quickly and easily schedule appointments or any kind of activity
associated with a date and/or a time.
In Date Book Plus, you can do the following:
■
Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and date.
■
Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week to easily spot available times and any
potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts, or display descriptions of your appointments for one
or two weeks.
■
Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning, lunch, or afternoon
appointments, or display a calendar for an entire year.
■
Display a list of both your appointments and your To Do items.
■
Create unscheduled events or To Do items that float from one day to the next until you
complete them.
■
Create a Daily Journal to track events with automatic time stamps.
■
Set an alarm to sound prior to the scheduled activity, and create reminders for events that are
based on a particular date, rather than time of day, such as birthdays and anniversaries.
■
Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry in your Date
Book.
To open Date Book Plus:
■
Press Date Book Plus
. Date Book Plus opens to today’s schedule.
@
W
Q
%
A
S
Z
(
:
E
$
D
X
)
R
F
C
/
–
*
Y
+
G
H
V
B
T
1
4
7
U
2
5
J
N
8
I
K
3
#
O
6
L'
9
.
M
P"
0
...
Date Book Plus button
Tip:
Page 54
Press Date Book Plus
repeatedly to cycle through the Day, Week, Week with Text,
Month, Year, and List views.
Applications Overview
Contacts
Contacts enables you to keep names, addresses, phone numbers, and other information
about your personal or business contacts.
In Contacts, you can do the following:
■
Store thousands of names, addresses, phone numbers, e-mail addresses, and more.
■
Quickly look up, enter, or duplicate names, addresses, phone numbers, and other information.
■
Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, mobile, etc.) or e-mail addresses for each
name.
■
Attach a note to each Contacts entry, in which you can enter additional information about the
entry.
■
Assign Contacts entries to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical
groups.
■
Dial numbers using infrared communication and a data-enabled mobile phone.
To open Contacts:
■
Press Contacts
. Contacts opens to display the Contacts list.
@
W
Q
%
A
S
Z
(
:
E
$
D
X
)
R
F
C
/
–
T
*
Y
+
G
H
V
B
1
4
7
U
2
5
J
N
8
I
K
3
#
O
6
L'
9
.
M
P"
0
...
Contacts button
Tip:
Press Contacts
Chapter 4
repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have entries.
Page 55
To Do List
To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things that you
have to do.
In To Do List, you can do the following:
■
Make a quick and convenient list of things to do.
■
Assign a priority level to each task.
■
Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do items.
■
Assign To Do items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.
■
Sort your To Do items either by due date, priority level, or category.
■
Attach notes to individual To Do items for a description or clarification of the task.
To open To Do List:
■
Press To Do List
. To Do List displays the category of items you last viewed.
@
W
Q
%
A
S
Z
(
:
E
$
D
X
)
R
F
C
/
–
T
*
Y
+
G
H
V
B
1
4
7
U
2
5
J
N
8
I
K
3
#
O
6
L'
9
.
M
P"
0
...
To Do List button
Tip:
Page 56
Press the To Do List
To Do items.
repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have
Applications Overview
Memo Pad
Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with records in other
applications such as Date Book Plus, Contacts, or To Do List.
In Memo Pad, you can do the following:
■
Take notes or any kind of message on your handheld.
■
Drag and drop memos into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word when you
synchronize using Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology.
■
Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.
■
Take down phone numbers and other types of information. Later, you can copy and paste this
information to other applications.
To open Memo Pad:
■
Press Memo Pad
. Memo Pad displays the category of memos you last viewed.
@
W
Q
%
A
S
Z
(
:
E
$
D
X
)
R
F
C
/
–
T
*
Y
+
G
H
V
B
1
4
7
U
2
5
J
N
8
I
K
3
#
O
6
L'
9
.
M
P"
0
...
Memo Pad button
Tip:
Press Memo Pad
memos.
Chapter 4
repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have
Page 57
CityTime
CityTime helps you keep track of the time anywhere around the globe.
In CityTime, you can do the following:
■
Select a home city as a point of reference.
■
Display the day and time in four other cities simultaneously.
■
Add a definition for any city that isn’t in the default list.
■
Display sunrise and sunset information for your home city.
To open CityTime:
1. Press Option
.
2. Press To Do List
Tip:
Page 58
.
You can also open CityTime by tapping the CityTime icon
Launcher.
in the Applications
Applications Overview
Calculator
Calculator enables you to perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division and a
variety of advanced math and scientific calculations.
In Calculator, you can do the following:
■
Select a view to perform specific types of calculations including: math, trigonometry, finance,
logic, statistics, weight/temp, length, area, and volume.
■
Store and retrieve values.
■
Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming a series of “chain”
calculations.
■
Create a custom view with the buttons you use most often.
■
Switch to basic mode to perform simple calculations.
To open Calculator:
1. Press Option
.
2. Press Memo Pad
.
Tip:
You can also open Calculator by tapping the Calculator icon
Launcher.
Tip:
Hold Option
and press Memo Pad
Advanced mode.
Chapter 4
in the Applications
repeatedly to toggle between Basic and
Page 59
Expense
Expense lets you keep track of your expenses and then transfer the information to a
spreadsheet on your computer.
In Expense, you can do the following:
■
Record dates, types of expenses, amount spent, payment method, and other details
associated with any money that you spend.
■
Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups.
■
Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with each particular expense.
■
Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category.
■
Sort your expenses by date or expense type.
■
Transfer your expense information to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (version 5.0 or later) on
your computer. (Microsoft Excel is not included in the Treo handheld package.)
To open Expense:
1. Press Option
2. Press Menu
.
.
3. Tap the Expense icon
Page 60
.
Applications Overview
Chapter 5
Common Tasks
Your Treo™ 90 handheld includes a full suite of personal information manager (PIM) applications:
Date Book Plus, Contacts, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense. This chapter provides instructions
on how to do tasks that are common to these applications. It’s easy to transfer what you learn in
one application to the other applications because the structure and behavior of these applications
are quite similar.
Throughout this chapter, the term “record” is used to refer to an individual item in any of the PIM
applications: a single Date Book Plus event, Contacts entry, To Do List item, Memo Pad memo,
or Expense item.
Creating records
You can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book Plus, Contacts, To Do
List, Memo Pad, and Expense.
To create a record:
1. Open the application in which you want to create a record.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select New… (/N).
4. In Date Book Plus only: Select start and end times for your event, and then hold Option
and press Return
.
5. Enter text for the record.
Note:
You do not have to press Shift
to capitalize the first letter of the name. Your
handheld automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field (except numeric and
e-mail fields).
6. Use the scroll buttons or tap a field directly to move between fields.
7. (Optional) Tap Details to select attributes for the record.
8. In Contacts only: Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
There’s no need to save the record because your handheld saves it automatically.
Chapter 5
Page 61
Editing records
After you create a record, you can change, delete, or enter new text at any time. Two screen
features tell you when your handheld is in editing mode:
■
A blinking cursor
■
One or more edit lines
Blinking cursor
Edit line
Entering text
For information on how to enter text using the keyboard on your handheld, the onscreen
keyboard, or the keyboard attached to your computer, see Chapter 2.
Edit menu
The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. In general, commands
available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select (or highlight) in an application.
To select text in an application:
1. Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select.
2. Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it. You can drag across the text to select additional
words, or drag down to select a group of lines.
Tip:
To select a word, double-tap the word. To select a whole line, triple-tap the line.
The following commands may appear in an Edit menu:
Undo
Reverses the action of the last edit command. For example, if you used
Cut to remove text, Undo restores the text you removed. Undo also
reverses deletions done by using backspace.
Cut
Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of your
handheld. You can paste the text you cut into another area of the current
application or into a different application.
Page 62
Common Tasks
Copy
Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of your
handheld. You can paste the text that you copy into another area of the
current application or into a different application.
Paste
Inserts the text that you cut or copied at the selected point in a record. The
text you paste replaces any selected text. If you did not previously cut or
copy text, Paste does nothing.
Select All
Selects all of the text in the current record or screen. This enables you to
cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere.
Keyboard
Opens the onscreen keyboard. When you finish with the onscreen
keyboard, hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Keyboard Help
Opens screens that show many keyboard shortcuts and the base
characters associated with symbols and other extended characters. Use
this command anytime you need forget how to do something with the
keyboard.
Deleting records
To delete a record in any of the PIM applications:
1. Select the record you want to delete.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select the Delete command:
Date Book Plus: Delete Event
Contacts: Delete Contact
To Do List: Delete Item
Memo Pad: Delete Memo
Expense: Delete Item
A confirmation dialog box appears. If you want to save a copy of the deleted item to an archive
file in Palm Desktop software, be sure that the check box is checked. If you don’t want to save
a copy, tap the check box to remove the check.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
If you choose to save a copy of the selected item, your handheld transfers it to the archive file on
your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
Chapter 5
Page 63
Other ways to delete records
You can also delete records in the following ways:
■
In the Details dialog box of the application, tap Delete, and then hold Option
Return
to finish.
■
Delete the text of the record.
Note:
and press
In Date Book Plus, if you delete the text of a repeating event, you delete all instances
of that event.
Purging records
Over time, as you use Date Book Plus, To Do List, and Expense, you’ll accumulate records in these
applications that have outlived their usefulness. For example, events that occurred months ago
remain in the Date Book Plus, and To Do items that you marked as completed remain in the list,
as do Expense items.
All these outdated records take up memory on your handheld, so it’s a good idea to remove them
by using Purge. If you think Date Book Plus or To Do List records might prove useful later, you
can purge them from your handheld and save them in an archive file.
Purging is not available in Contacts or Memo Pad, so delete outdated records from these
applications individually.
To purge records:
1. Open the application.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select Purge (/E).
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Date Book Plus: Tap the pick list and select how old a record must be to be purged. Purge
deletes repeating events if the last of the series ends before the date that you purge records.
Date Book Plus, To Do List: If you want to save a copy of the purged records to an archive
file on your desktop, be sure that the check box is checked. If you don’t want to save a copy,
tap the check box to remove the check box.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
If you chose to save a copy of the purged records, your handheld transfers them to an archive file
on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
Note:
Page 64
Purging does not happen automatically. You must use the Purge command to make it
happen.
Common Tasks
Categorizing records
Categorize records in Contacts, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense applications so that they are
grouped logically and are easy to review. (You can also categorize applications. See page 37 for
details.)
When you create a record, your handheld automatically places it in the category that is currently
displayed. If the category is All, your handheld assigns it to the Unfiled category. You can leave
an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any time.
System-defined and user-defined categories
By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and Unfiled, and userdefined categories, such as Business and Personal.
You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete the userdefined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined categories. You can have
a maximum of 15 user-defined categories in each application.
Contacts contains the QuickList user-defined category, in which you can store the names,
addresses, and phone numbers you might need in emergencies (doctor, fire department, lawyer,
etc.).
Expense contains two user-defined categories, New York and Paris, to show how you might sort
your expenses for different business trips.
Note:
The illustrations in this section come from Memo Pad, but you can use these procedures
in all the applications in which categories are available. Categories are not available in
Date Book Plus.
To move a record into a category:
1. Open the record you want to categorize.
2. In Contacts: Press Menu
, and under Record, select Edit Contact (/E).
3. In the record view, tap the Category list to display the list of available categories.
Category list
4. Select the category for the record.
Tip:
You can also assign a record to a category by tapping the Details button, selecting a
category from the Category pick list in the Details dialog box, and then holding Option
and pressing Return
to finish.
Chapter 5
Page 65
To display a category of records:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the list screen.
Category pick list
2. Select the category you want to view.
The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category.
To define a new category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Category pick list
2. Tap Edit Categories.
3. Tap New.
4. Enter the name of the new category.
Page 66
Common Tasks
5. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to finish.
You can assign any of your records to the new category.
To rename a category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
2. Tap Edit Categories.
3. Select the category that you want to rename, and then tap Rename.
4. Enter the new name for the category.
5. Hold Option
Tip:
and press Return
twice to finish.
You can group the records in two or more categories into one category by giving the
categories the same name. For example, if you change the name of the Personal
category to Business, all records formerly in the Personal category appear in the
Business category.
Finding records
Your handheld offers several ways to find information quickly:
■
All applications: The Find utility locates any text that you specify, always starting with the
current application.
■
Date Book Plus, To Do List, Memo Pad: The Phone Number Lookup feature displays the
Contacts list and shows names and phone numbers for entries that have phone numbers. You
can add the information that appears in this list to a record.
Chapter 5
Page 67
■
Contacts: The Instant Lookup feature lets you scroll immediately to a Contacts entry by
entering the first few letters of a first or last name, or the first name initial and the first few
letters of a last name.
■
Expense: The Lookup feature displays the Contacts entries that have data in the Company
field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record.
Looking up Contacts records
When working with Contacts, the buttons on your handheld make it easy to navigate among your
Contacts entries.
■
In the Contacts list screen, the scroll buttons move the highlight. Holding Shift
and
using the scroll buttons moves up or down an entire screen of records. If you press and hold
a scroll button, you accelerate the scrolling.
■
In the Contact View screen, the scroll buttons move to the previous or next Contacts record.
You can also use the Instant Lookup feature, to quickly scroll to any of your Contacts entries.
To use Instant Lookup to find a Contacts record:
1. From the Contact list, tap the Look Up line.
2. Enter one of the following for the name you want to find:
■
First name initial and last name.
■
First name
■
Last name
For example, entering an “ca” displays “Chris Cadwell,” “David Cagle,” and “Carolyn Malestic”
as shown above. Entering “cmal” finds only “Carolyn Malestic.”
3. Use the scroll buttons to select the contact name.
4. Press Return
Page 68
to view the contents of the record.
Common Tasks
Using Find
You can use Find to locate any text that you specify, in any application.
To use Find:
1. Press Option
Tip:
and then press Shift
to open the Find dialog box.
If you select text in an application before you opening the Find dialog box, the
selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box.
2. Enter the text that you want to find.
Find is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for the name “davidson” also finds
“Davidson.”
Find locates any word that begin with the text you enter. For example, searching for “plan”
finds “planet,” but not “airplane.”
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to start the search.
Find searches for the text in all records and all notes.
As your handheld searches for the text, you can tap Stop at any time. You may want to do this
if the entry you want appears before your handheld finishes the search. To continue the
search after you tap Stop, tap Find More.
4. Tap the text that you want to review.
Using Phone Number Lookup
Phone Number Lookup displays the information you entered in Contacts, and it lets you add this
information to a record.
To use Phone Number Lookup:
1. Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number. The record can be in Date
Book Plus, To Do List, or Memo Pad.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Phone Lookup (/L).
4. If your Contacts entries are sorted by last name, begin to spell the last name. If your Contacts
are sorted by first name, begin to spell the first name.
Chapter 5
Page 69
Note:
The first initial and last name search in the Contacts Instant Lookup feature is not
available in the Phone Number Lookup feature.
Phone Number Lookup displays records that begin with the letters you enter based on the
sort method in your Contacts application. For example, if your Contacts are sorted by last
name and you enter “su,” the list displays “John Sung” and “Mario Suarez.” If your Contacts
are sorted by first name, and your enter “su,” the list displays “Susan Smith” and “Suki
Sakimoto.”
5. Continue to spell the name you’re looking for, or when you see the name, scroll to it.
6. Press Space
or Return
.
The name you selected, along with the other information associated with it, is pasted into the
record you selected in step 1.
Phone Number Lookup tips
You can also enter the keyboard shortcut (/L) to activate the Phone Number Lookup feature in
the following circumstances:
■
While entering text: For example, if your Contacts entries are sorted by last name and you
want to insert the full name and phone number for someone with the last name “Williams,”
enter “Wi” and then the Phone Number Lookup keyboard shortcut (/L). Assuming you have
only one Contacts record with a last name that begins with “Wi,” your handheld inserts the full
name “Fred Williams” (and its associated information). If you have more than one name that
begins with “Wi,” the Phone Number Lookup screen appears and highlights the first record
that begins with “Wi.”
■
For selected text: Drag to highlight the text, and then enter the Phone Number Lookup
keyboard shortcut (/L). Your handheld replaces the selected text and adds the name and its
associated information.
Page 70
Common Tasks
Looking up names to add to expense records
In Expense, Lookup displays the names of Contacts entries that have data in the Company field.
You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record.
To add names to an Expense record:
1. Open the Expense record to which you want to add names.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap Who.
Tap here
4. Tap Lookup.
The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names of Contacts entries that have data in
the Company field.
5. Use the scroll buttons to select the name you want to add.
6. Press Space
or Return
.
The name appears in the Attendees screen.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to add more names.
8. Hold Option
Chapter 5
and press Return
twice to finish.
Page 71
Sorting lists of records
You can sort lists of records in various ways, depending on the application. Sorting is available in
applications that have list screens: Contacts, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense.
Note:
You can also assign records to categories. See page 65 for details.
To sort records in To Do List and Expense:
1. Open the application to display the list screen.
2. Tap Show.
3. Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To sort records in Contacts and Memo Pad:
1. Open the application to display the list screen.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R).
Memo Pad
Contacts
4. Do one of the following:
Contacts: Tap the setting you want.
Memo Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or Manual.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To sort the Memo list manually, tap and drag a memo to a new location in the list.
Note:
Page 72
To make the list of your memos appear in Palm Desktop software as you manually sorted
it on your handheld, open Memo in Palm Desktop software, click Sort by, and then select
Order on Handheld.
Common Tasks
Making records private
In all PIM applications, except Expense, you can make individual records private. Private records
remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting to hide or mask all private
records. See the section that begins on page 47 for details.
Hiding and masking private records
You can hide records that you mark as private. When you hide records, they do not appear
anywhere in the application. When you mask records, a visual placeholder appears where the
record would normally appear. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private
records.
Note:
As a security measure, masked Contacts records are temporarily hidden when you search
for records. So you will not see a placeholder for these records when viewing the results
of a Lookup or Find request.
To make a record private:
1. Display the entry that you want to make private.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Private check box to select it.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To hide or mask all private records:
1. Make sure the records you want to mask are marked private.
2. Press Option
and then press Menu
3. Tap the Security icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
4. Tap the Current Privacy pick list.
Tap here
5. Tap either Hide Records or Mask Records.
6. Hold Option
Chapter 5
and press Return
to confirm that you want to change the security setting.
Page 73
To display all private records:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Tap the Security icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Tap the Current Privacy pick list.
Tap here
4. Tap Show Records.
If you do not have a password, private records become visible.
If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Enter your password
in this dialog box, and then hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To display a specific masked record:
1. Open the application that contains the record you want to view.
2. Tap the shaded bar that masks the record.
Tap here
Note:
If you have a password, you must enter your password and then hold Option
and press
Return
to view the record. The record becomes masked again when you move to
another record.
To display all private records in a specific application:
1. Open the application in which you want to display the records.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Security (/H).
4. Tap the Current Privacy pick list.
Page 74
Common Tasks
5. Tap Show Records.
6. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Attaching notes
In all PIM applications except Memo Pad, you can attach a note to a record. A note can be up to
several thousand characters long. For example, for an appointment in Date Book Plus, you can
attach a note with directions to the location.
To attach a note to a record:
1. Display the entry to which you want to add a note.
2. In Contacts only: Press Menu
, and under Record, select Edit Contact (/E).
3. Tap Details.
4. Tap Note.
5. Enter your note.
6. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note.
Note icon
To review or edit a note:
1. Tap the Note icon
.
To delete a note:
1. Tap the Note icon
.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 5
and press Return
for Yes.
Page 75
Choosing fonts
In all PIM applications except Expense, you can change the font style to make text easier to read.
You can choose a different font style for each application.
Small font
Bold font
Large font
To change the font style:
1. Open an application.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Font (/F).
4. Use the scroll buttons to select the font style you want to use.
Bold font
Small font
5. Hold Option
Large font
and press Return
to finish.
Exchanging and updating data:
HotSync operations
The HotSync process automatically synchronizes — that is, exchanges and updates — data
between your handheld and desktop software. Changes you make on your handheld or desktop
software appear in both places after a HotSync operation. HotSync technology synchronizes only
the needed portions of files, thus reducing synchronization time. You can synchronize your data
directly by connecting your handheld to your computer with the HotSync cable or by beaming the
data from the IR port on your handheld to the IR port on your computer, or indirectly with a modem
or network. See Chapter 8 for information about performing HotSync operations via the IR port,
a modem, or a network.
Page 76
Common Tasks
Performing a HotSync operation for the first time
The first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user information on both the handheld
and Palm Desktop software. After you enter this information and synchronize, the HotSync
Manager recognizes your handheld and doesn’t ask for this information again.
If you are a System Administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users, you may want
to create a user profile. See the section that begins on page 171 before performing the following
steps.
Important:
You must use the HotSync cable for your first HotSync operation.
The following steps assume that you have already installed the Palm Desktop software. If you
have not installed this software, see page 24 for instructions.
To perform a local HotSync operation:
1. Connect your handheld to the Hotsync cable. See the section that begins on page 23 for
details.
2. If the HotSync Manager is not running, start it: On the Windows desktop, click Start, and then
choose Programs. Navigate to the Handspring (or Palm) program group and choose HotSync
Manager. Alternatively, you can start the Palm Desktop software which automatically opens
the HotSync Manager.
3. Press the HotSync button on the cable.
HotSync
button
Important:
The first time you perform a HotSync operation, you must enter a user name in the
New User dialog box and click OK. Every handheld should have a unique name. To
prevent loss of a user’s records, never try to synchronize more than one handheld
to the same user name.
4. From the Select User dialog box, choose the user name you assigned to your handheld.
The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins.
Chapter 5
Page 77
5. Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.
After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove the cable from your handheld.
Beaming information
Your handheld is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that you can use to beam information to
another Palm OS® device that’s close by and also has an IR port. The IR port is located on the top
of your handheld, between the expansion slot and the stylus, behind the small dark shield.
You can beam the following information between Palm OS devices:
■
The record currently displayed in Date Book Plus, Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad
■
All records of the category currently displayed in Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad
■
A special record in Contacts that you designate as your personal business card, containing
information you want to exchange with business contacts
■
An application installed in RAM memory
You can also use the infrared port to perform HotSync operations. See the section that begins
on page 160 for details.
To select a business card:
1. In Contacts, create an entry that contains the information you want on your personal business
card.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select Select Business Card.
4. Hold Option
Page 78
and press Return
for Yes.
Common Tasks
To beam a record, business card, or category of records:
1. Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam.
2.
Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select one of the following:
■
The Beam command for an individual record (/B)
■
In Contacts only: Beam Business Card (/M)
■
Beam Category (/Y)
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR port of the
receiving handheld.
Tip:
For best results, the path between the two handhelds must be clear of obstacles. If you
have difficulty beaming information, see the troubleshooting tips that begin on page 223.
5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you
continue working on your handheld.
To beam an application:
1. Press Option
2.
Press Menu
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Under App, select Beam (/B).
4. Tap the Beam From pick list and indicate whether the application you want to beam is located
on your handheld or an expansion card.
5. Tap the application you want to transfer.
Note:
Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed. These are listed with
a lock icon next to them.
6. Tap Beam.
Chapter 5
Page 79
7. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR port of the
receiving handheld.
8. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you
continue working on your handheld.
To receive beamed information:
1. Turn on your handheld.
2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting handheld to open the Beam Status
dialog box.
3. When the Beam dialog box appears, select a category for the entry.
Tip:
If you do not select a category the entry is placed in the Unfiled category.
4. Hold Option
Page 80
and press Return
for Yes.
Common Tasks
Chapter 6
Application-Specific Tasks
This chapter is organized by application and gives instructions on how to do tasks that are specific
to each of the following applications:
■
Date Book Plus
■
Contacts
■
To Do List
■
Memo Pad
■
CityTime
■
Calculator
■
Expense
Chapter 6
Page 81
Date Book Plus
When you open Date Book Plus, the screen shows the current date and a list of times for a normal
business day.
Working in Day View
Day View shows an hourly calendar for a particular date. If there are events scheduled on that
date, they appear in the appropriate time slot.
To view or select a date, do one of the following:
■ Press the scroll buttons to move forward or backward one day at a time.
Note:
If you plan to do a lot of scrolling in Date Book Plus while the lid is closed, consider
enabling the Scroll before day move option in the Day Options dialog box. See page
98 for details.
■
Press Shift
and then a scroll button to scroll by weeks.
■
Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the screen. If necessary,
tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to another week.
Previous week
Next week
Tap to select a day of
the current week
■
Press Menu
and under Options select Go to Day (/O). To scroll by days, press a scroll
button. To scroll by months, hold Shift
and press a scroll button. To scroll by years
hold Option
and press a scroll button. After you scroll to the date, press Space
to select it. You can also type the number of the day or tap the screen to select a date from
the calendar.
Previous year
Next year
Tap to select a month
Tap to select a day
Tap to select current date
Scheduling an event
A record in Date Book Plus is called an “event.” An event can be any kind of activity that you
associate with a day. You can enter a new event on any of the available time lines. When you
schedule an event, its description appears on the time line, and its duration is automatically set to
one hour. You can easily change the start time and duration for any event.
Note:
Page 82
It’s possible to schedule events that overlap, but Date Book Plus makes it easy to find
such conflicts. See page 93 for details.
Application-Specific Tasks
You can also schedule events that occur on a particular date but have no specific start or end
times, such as birthdays, holidays, and anniversaries. These are referred to as “untimed events.”
Untimed events appear at the top of the list of times, marked with a diamond. You can have more
than one untimed event on a particular date.
You can also schedule a repeating event, such as a weekly meeting, and continuous events, such
as a three-day conference or a vacation.
To schedule an event:
1. Select the date on which you want to schedule the event as described in the previous section.
2. Type the time the event begins to open the Set Time dialog box. For example, type 4 for 4:00.
Start Time
Tap to scroll to earlier hours
Tap to change hours
Tap to change minutes
Tap to scroll to later hours
3. If the event is longer than an hour, press the bottom scroll button and type the end time.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
5. Enter a description of the event. You can enter up to 255 characters.
Event description
Time bar shows
duration
6. Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event. A vertical line appears next to the time,
indicating the duration of the event.
To schedule an untimed event:
1. Select the date on which you want to schedule the event. See page 82 for details.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select New Appointment (/N).
Chapter 6
Page 83
4. Hold Option
event.
Tip:
and press Return
so that no start or end times are defined for the new
You can also create a new untimed event by making sure no event is selected and
then entering a description.
5. Enter a description of the event.
New
untimed
event
No time
selected
6. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event.
Note:
If you create an event and decide later that there is no particular start or end time, you
can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the time of the event in the Date Book Plus
screen, tap No Time, and then hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Rescheduling an event
You can easily make changes to your schedule with your handheld.
To reschedule an event:
1. Tap the event you want to reschedule.
2. Tap Details.
3. To change the time, tap the Time box and select a new time.
4. To change the date, tap the Date box and select a new date.
5. Hold Option
Page 84
and press Return
to finish.
Application-Specific Tasks
Setting an alarm for an event
The Alarm setting enables you to set an audible alarm for events in Date Book Plus. You can set
an alarm to sound minutes, hours, or days before an event. The default Alarm setting is 5 minutes
before the time of the event, but you can change this to any number of minutes, hours, or days.
When you set an alarm, this icon
appears to the far right of the event with the alarm. When
the alarm tone sounds, a reminder message also appears onscreen.
To set an alarm for an event:
1. Tap the event to which you want to assign an alarm.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Alarm check box to select it.
4. Tap the pick list to select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
5. Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the number of time units.
Enter number of
time units here
Tap here to
select unit of time
6. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Alarm for untimed events: You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. In this case, the alarm
triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours, or days before midnight (beginning) of the day
of the untimed event. No audible alarm sounds for an untimed event; instead, the reminder
message appears onscreen.
For example, you set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on February 4th. If the alarm is
set for 5 minutes, the reminder message appears at 11:55 PM on the night of February 3rd. The
reminder remains onscreen until you turn on your handheld and hold Option
to dismiss it.
and press Return
To dismiss the alarm reminder, do one of the following:
■
Tap OK to dismiss the alarm.
■
Tap Snooze to be reminded again in 5 minutes.
■
Tap Go To to clear the item from the reminder list and jump to that item.
Chapter 6
Page 85
To dismiss a reminder for multiple alarms, do one of the following:
■
Tap the check box next to an item to clear that item from the reminder list.
■
Tap the item text or icon clear the item from the reminder list and jump to that item.
■
Tap Done to close the reminder list without clearing the items. An indicator blinks in the
upper-left corner of the screen. To return to the reminder list, tap the blinking indicator.
■
Tap Snooze to be reminded again in 5 minutes. An indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of
the screen. To return to the reminder list, tap the blinking indicator.
■
Tap Clear All to dismiss all the alarms.
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
The Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular intervals or extend over a
period of consecutive days. A birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually.
Another example is a weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same
time of day.
Typically, a continuous event is an untimed event such as a business trip or a vacation that
continues for several days but doesn’t occur at a particular time of day.
To schedule a repeating or continuous event:
1. Tap the event.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box.
Page 86
Application-Specific Tasks
Repeat
box
4. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often the event repeats.
Tip:
For a continuous event, tap Day.
5. Enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to repeat on the Every line.
For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event repeats every other
month.
6. To specify an end date for the repeating or continuous event, tap the End on pick list and tap
Choose Date. Use the date picker to select an end date.
7. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
After you schedule a repeating or continuous event, this icon
event.
appears to the far right of the
Changing and deleting repeating or continuous events
If you change or delete a repeating or continuous event you can apply the action to only the
current event, to all instances of the event, or to the current event and instances that follow.
To change or delete repeating events:
1. Select the record you want to change or delete.
2. Tap Details.
3. Enter the change.
4.
Hold Option
and press Return
to accept the change, or tap Delete.
5. Tap one of the following:
Current. Changes or deletes only the current instance of the repeating event.
All. Changes or deletes all past, current, and future occurrences of this event.
Following. Changes or deletes the current event and all future occurrences of this event.
Chapter 6
Page 87
Considerations for repeating or continuous events
Keep the following points in mind:
■
If you change the start date of a repeating event, your handheld calculates the number of days
you moved the event. Your handheld then automatically changes the end date to maintain the
duration of the repeating event.
■
If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past occurrences
(prior to the day on which you change the setting) are not changed, and your handheld
creates a new repeating event.
■
If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from January 14th to
January 15th) and apply the change to All occurrences, the new date becomes the start date
of the repeating event. Your handheld adjusts the end date to maintain the duration of the
event. If you apply the change to Current or Future occurrences, past occurrences (prior to
the day on which you change the setting) are not changed.
■
If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a repeating event and apply
the change to Future occurrences, your handheld creates a new event. The start date of this
new event is the day on which the setting is changed. Past occurrences (prior to the day of
the change) are not changed.
■
If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that occurrence
no longer shows the Repeat icon .
Changing the Date Book Plus view
In addition to displaying the calendar for a specific day, you can also display a whole week in
graph or text format, a month, a year, or a list of your appointments, as well as the current time.
To cycle through Day, Week, Week with Text, Month, Year, and List views:
■
Repeatedly press Date Book Plus
to display the next view.
To display the current time:
1. Tap and hold the stylus on the date in the date bar to display the current time.
Tap and hold the date
Current time displays
2. Drag the stylus below the date bar and then lift it.
Note:
Page 88
If you lift the stylus while it is still on the date bar, the menu bar appears.
Application-Specific Tasks
Working in Week View
Week View shows the calendar of your events for an entire week. This view lets you quickly review
your appointments and available time slots. In addition, the graphical display helps you spot
overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.
Event details
Previous week
Next week
Tap for that day
Tap to show
event details
Week View
icon
Bar indicates
earlier event
Dot indicates
untimed event
Bar indicates
later event
Tips for using Week View
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap an event to show details for the event.
■
Press the scroll buttons to move forward or backward a week at a time.
■
To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or day.
■
Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time selected for a new event.
■
Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week View to move directly to that day
without selecting an event.
■
The Week View shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in the Date
Book Plus Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time span, a bar
appears at the top or bottom of that day's column. Use the onscreen scroll arrows to scroll
to the event.
Chapter 6
Page 89
Working in Week View with Text
The Week View with Text shows an entire week with a description of each scheduled event. This
view can display one or two weeks at a time and can include To Do items that are due on the
dates shown.
Toggle between
1 and 2 weeks
Scroll to
more events
Dot indicates
more events
Week View with
Text icon
Box indicates To
Do item
Tips for using Week View with Text
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap a day to display that day in the Day View.
■
Press the scroll buttons to move between weeks. You can also tap the scroll arrows in the
upper-right corner to move forward or backward a week.
■
Press Menu
different week.
■
Tap Go to open the date selector use the scroll buttons to select a week and then hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
■
Tap the number of weeks to toggle between a one week view and a two week view.
Page 90
, and under Options, select Go to Week (/O). Tap a number to select a
Application-Specific Tasks
Working in Month View
The Month View screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines in the Month
View indicate events, repeating events, and untimed events.
Previous/next month
Dashed line indicates continuous or repeating event
Dots on right or left side indicate events
Dots below date indicate untimed events
Month View
icon
You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month View. See page 96 for details.
Tips for using Month View
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap a day in the Month View to display that day in the Day View.
■
Press the scroll buttons to move between months. You can also tap the scroll arrows in the
upper-right corner to move forward or backward a month.
■
Press Menu
, and under Options, select Go to Month (/O) to open the date selector and
select a different month.
Working in Year View
The Year View shows an overview of your calendar for an entire year.
Description of event
on selected date
Blinking dot indicates
selected date
Dot indicates
scheduled events
Scroll to other days
Year View button
Chapter 6
Page 91
Tips for using Year View
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap a day to display the date and events for that day in the title bar. A minus sign indicates
only one event is scheduled on that day. A plus sign indicates multiple events are scheduled
on that day.
■
Press the scroll buttons to move between days. You can also tap the scroll arrows in the
lower-right corner to move forward or backward a day.
■
Tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner to move forward or backward a year.
■
Press Menu
, and under Options select Year Preferences (/Y) to set display options.
Working in List View
The List View is a text oriented view that is integrated with To Do List. It displays a list of events
and To Do items for the selected week(s).
Scroll to
other weeks
Selected
week’s dates
List View button
Tips for using List View
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap a line to select it. The start and end time display briefly in the title bar. To redisplay the
event details, tap to the left of the description.
■
Tap the description of the selected line to display the event in Day View.
■
Press the scroll buttons to select specific items on the screen. You can also tap the up scroll
arrow in the upper-right corner to jump forward by one of the following: 1 Day, 1 Week, 1
Month, or Pick (a specific date). Then tap the scroll arrows to move forward or backward a
week.
■
Press Menu
, and under Options, select Go to Date (/O) to open the date selector and
select a different date.
■
Press Menu
options.
Page 92
, and under Options, select List View Preferences (/L) to set display
Application-Specific Tasks
Spotting event conflicts
With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it’s possible to schedule events
that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).
An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week View as overlapping bars. The Day View
displays overlapping brackets to the left of the conflicting times.
Event
conflict
Working with floating events
Date Book Plus can include events that are a combination of a To Do item and a Date Book event.
These events are called “floating events.” Floating events are not assigned to a specific date, but
can still be timed or untimed, can have alarms, and can repeat. If a floating event is not completed
by midnight, it automatically advances to the next day until you mark it complete.
You can distinguish a floating event from an integrated To Do item by the circle that appears next
to the floating event (in place of the To Do item priority number and check box). Floating events
appear in alphabetical order at the top of the Day View screen between any integrated To Do
items and untimed events.
To create a floating event:
1. From the Day View, press Menu
.
2. Under Record, select New Floating Event (/I).
3.
Enter a description of the event.
4. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the floating event.
To mark a floating event complete:
■
Tap the circle to the right or left of the event.
Tips for using floating events:
■
To prioritize floating events, enter a number followed by a space or dash as the first few
characters of the description.
■
To convert an existing event to a floating event, select the event, tap Details, tap Float as the
Type, and then hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
■
When you complete a repeating floating event, it marks only the current occurrence of the
event as complete.
Chapter 6
Page 93
■
Avoid scheduling a floating event that repeats daily. These events can accumulate quickly
unless you complete them each day.
■
When viewing a floating event in a desktop application, the Note field will contain a series of
characters: ##f@@@@@@ for an incomplete event and ##c@@@@@@ for a complete
event. Do not remove or edit these characters.
Working with To Do items
Date Book Plus can create and display To Do items. To Do items appear in priority order at the
top of the Day View screen.
To create To Do items in Date Book Plus:
1. From the Day View, press Menu
.
2. Under Record, select New To Do (/T).
3. Enter a description of the To Do item.
4. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the item.
To mark a To Do item complete:
■
Tap the check box next to the item.
Tips for using To Do items:
■
When you create a To Do item in Date Book Plus, the priority and category are based on the
settings in the Create Options dialog box. See the section that begins on page 100 for details.
■
If a To Do item does not appear in Date Book Plus, confirm that the category assigned to the
item is selected. See the section that begins on page 100 for details.
■
If you do not complete a To Do item on or before the due date, then an ! (exclamation mark)
appears next to the item as a reminder that it is overdue.
Using the Daily Journal
You can use the Daily Journal feature to record events as they occur. Events are recorded with
automatic time-stamping as Date Book Plus Notes so they do not clutter your schedule. The Daily
Journal is especially useful for tracking activities such as sales calls, start and end times for
consulting or other work, or keeping a record of how you spend your time at the office.
To create a Daily Journal entry:
1. From the Day View, press Menu
.
2. Under Record, select New Journal Entry (/J).
Date Book Plus creates an untimed event, opens a Note for this event, and inserts the current
time. If you’ve already started a journal for the current day, Date Book Plus opens the existing
journal and inserts a new entry.
3. Enter a description for the journal entry.
4. Hold Option
Page 94
and press Return
to finish.
Application-Specific Tasks
Using templates
You can use templates to create a list of standard events. You can then select an event from this
list and add it to your calendar. Since Date Book Plus saves all the event attributes, including
alarms and notes, templates can really save you time when entering reminder notices or events
that recur on different days and times.
To create a template:
1. Select the event you want to save as a template.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select tap Create Template (/V).
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To schedule a template event:
1. Select the date on which you want to schedule the event.
2. From the Day View, tap the time line that corresponds to the beginning of the event.
3. Tap New and select Template from the list.
Tap to create an event
from a template
4. Select the event from the Appointment Templates list.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 6
and press Return
to finish.
Page 95
Date Book Plus menus
Date Book Plus menus are shown here for your reference, and Date Book Plus features that are
not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 33 for information about choosing menu commands.
Record menu
List View
Day View
New To Do
Creates a new To Do item and adds it to your Date Book Plus and To Do
List database.
Send Item
Enables you to send the selected event to someone else via an SMS
message. When you select this command, the Send dialog box opens
where you can select or enter the recipient’s mobile phone number. See
page 208 for more information.
Note:
Duplicate Item
This command appears only if you installed the Palm SMS
application while configuring the Wireless Suite.
Creates a copy of the selected event and opens the Details dialog box for
the new event.
Options menu
Week View
Week View with Text
Day View
Year View
Month View
Page 96
List View
Application-Specific Tasks
Preferences
(Day View)
Chapter 6
■
Start/End Time. Defines the start and end times for Date Book Plus
screens. If the time slots you select do not fit on one screen, you can
tap the scroll arrows to scroll up and down.
■
Event Duration. Defines the default duration for new events.
■
Week Start. Defines the first day of the week. This setting overrides the
System Preferences setting for all Date Book Plus views.
■
Initial View. Defines the view that appears when you start Date Book
Plus.
■
Button Views. Defines which views display when you repeatedly press
the Date Book Plus button. By default, all views appear.
■
Display Options. Opens the Display Options dialog box where you can
define the following options:
Page 97
Display Options
Page 98
■
Show Time Bars. Activates the time bars that appear in the Day View.
The time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate event
conflicts
■
Compress Day View. Controls how times appear in the Day View. When
Compress Day View is off, all time slots display. When it is on, start and
end times display for each event, but blank time slots toward the
bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling.
■
Show PM Label. Displays a “p” after PM times.
■
Show End Times. Displays all time bars and time slots for end times of
an event.
■
Scroll Before Day Move. Determines whether the front panel scroll
buttons will scroll up and down within the current day before scrolling
to the previous or next day.
■
Auto-scroll Time. Displays events based on the time of day when the
Day View contains more than one screen of information.
■
Float Advance at Midnight. Advances floating events to the next day at
midnight of the current day.
■
Show Completed Floating Events. Displays completed floating events.
Application-Specific Tasks
Alarm
Preferences
Chapter 6
■
Alarm Sound. Sets the tone of the alarm.
■
Snooze Sound. Sets the tone of the snooze alarm.
■
Remind Sound. Sets the tone of the reminder alarm. The reminder
alarm sounds when the snooze alarm is not acknowledged.
■
Play Sound. Defines how many tones the alarm emits before it stops.
The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times.
■
Repeat Alarm. Defines how many times the alarm repeats when it is not
acknowledged. The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, 10
Times, and 100 Times.
■
Every. Defines how often the alarm sound repeats. The choices are
Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes.
■
Alarm Preset. Automatically sets an alarm for each new event. The
silent alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours
before midnight of the date of the event.
Page 99
To Do
Preferences
■
Show Categories. Displays the To Do items in the categories you
select.
■
Priorities Displayed. Displays To Do items with the selected priority
level. The choices are 1 only, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, and 1-5.
■
Show Priority. Displays the priority level for To Do items.
■
Show Completed Items. Displays completed To Do items.
■
Show Undated Items. Shows all To Do items that have not been
assigned a due date.
■
Show Dated Items. Shows all To Do items that have been assigned a
due date.
■
Days before Due Date. Defines the number of days before the due date
that an item will appear in Day View as a To Do item.
■
Create Options. Opens the Create Options dialog box where you can
select the default priority and category for To Do Items you create in
Date Book Plus.
UnDelete from
Archive
Restores the last event you deleted from Date Book Plus (provided it was
stored in the Archive file). You can select this command repeatedly to
restore additional events.
Go to Week
Enables you to jump to a specific week by tapping the week number in the
current year.
Page 100
Application-Specific Tasks
Week
Preferences
■
Time Format. Defines the format of the time display. The choices are
No Time, 11p, 11:30p, 23, 23:30.
■
Display To Do. Defines where To Do items will appear on the Date
Book Plus screen. The choices are Top, Bottom, and Hide.
■
Week Start. Defines the first day of the week for Week View with Text.
■
Wordwrap Single Entry. Wraps text in cells that contain a single event
to display as much text as will fit in the cell.
■
Hide Untimed Floating Events. Removes untimed floating events from
the Week View with Text display.
■
Show Journal. Displays a Daily Journal entry.
■
Include Week Numbers in Title. Displays the selected week number in
the title bar.
■
Show Timed Events. Displays events that you assigned to a specific
time.
■
Show Untimed Events. Displays events that you assigned to a date, but
did not assign to a specific time.
■
Show Daily Repeating Events. Displays events that repeat each day.
■
Include Week Numbers in Title. Displays week numbers in the title bar
for the first and last weeks in the month.
■
Show Zero Duration Events. Displays events that have no duration in
the Month View display.
Month
Preferences
Chapter 6
Page 101
Year
Preferences
■
Hide Floating and Done Items. Removes floating events and completed
To Do items from the Year View display.
■
Hide Untimed Events. Removes untimed events from the Year View
display.
■
Hide Zero Duration Events. Removes events without a duration from
the Year View display.
■
Hide Events <. Removes events that are shorter than the time you
specify from the Year View display. The choices are 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, and
12.
■
Hide Daily Repeating Events. Removes events that repeat daily from
the Year View display.
■
Date Book. Determines which type of events appear in the List View
display. The choices are: Appt, Float, Done, Alarms Only, and Repeat
events only appear once.
■
To Do. Determines which type of To Do items appear in the List View
display. The choices are All, Not Complete, Complete, and None. If you
choose either Not Complete or Complete, you also have the following
choices: Dated & Undated, Dated only, and Undated only.
■
Filter by Text. Displays events that contain the text you enter in this field
and hides events that do not contain this text.
■
Show. Determines the type of information that will appear for each
event. The choices are Day Name and Time.
List View
Preferences
About Date
Book+
Page 102
Shows version information for Date Book Plus.
Application-Specific Tasks
Contacts
Contacts is the application where you store name and address information about people or
businesses and more.
Creating a Contacts entry
You can create Contacts entries on your handheld, or you can use your desktop software to
create entries on your computer and then download the entries to your handheld with your next
HotSync operation.
Many desktop software applications also have data import capabilities that enable you to load
database files into your Contacts list on your handheld. See the section that begins on page 34
and the online Help for your desktop software for more information.
To create a new Contacts entry:
1. Press Contacts
2. Press Menu
.
.
3. Under Record, select New Contact (/N).
Cursor at
Last name
4. Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Contacts list.
5. Press the bottom scroll button to move to the First Name field and then enter the person's
first name.
6. Press the bottom scroll button to move to other fields and then enter the other information
that you want to include in this entry.
Tip:
Hold Shift
and use the scroll buttons to move between pages in this entry.
7. After you finish entering information, hold Option
Chapter 6
and press Return
to finish.
Page 103
Tip:
To create an entry that always appears at the top of the Contacts list, begin the Last name
or Company field with a symbol, as in *If Found Call*. This entry can contain contact
information in case you lose your handheld.
Duplicating a Contacts entry
You can duplicate existing entries, which can be helpful when you want to enter multiple people
from a single organization. When you duplicate an entry, the word Copy appears next to the name
in the First Name field.
To duplicate an entry:
1. From the Contacts list, select the name you want to duplicate.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select Duplicate Contact (/T).
4. Edit the entry as necessary.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Selecting types of phone numbers
You can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that you associate with a
Contacts entry. Any changes you make apply only to the current entry.
To select other types of phone numbers in an entry:
1. Select the contact name for the entry that you want to change.
2. Press Space
3. Press Menu
to open the entry.
.
4. Under Record, select Edit Contact (/E).
5. Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change.
Tap
triangle
6. Select a new label.
7. Hold Option
Page 104
and press Return
to finish.
Application-Specific Tasks
Changing Contact entry details
The Contact Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that you can associate with an
entry.
To open the Contact Entry Details dialog box:
1. Select the name for the entry whose details you want to change.
2. Press Space
3. Press Menu
to open the entry.
.
4. Under Record, select Edit Contact (/E).
5. Press Menu
.
6. Under Record, select Details (/E).
7. Select any of the following settings:
Category
Assign the entry to a category.
Private
Hide this entry when Security is turned on.
8. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Dialing a number in your Contacts list
You can dial any number that you’ve entered in your Contacts list.
Note:
To use the Dial command you must first install the Palm SMS application and the
appropriate phone driver from the Handspring CD-ROM.
To dial a number in your Contacts list:
1. From the Contacts list, use the Instant Lookup feature to select the number you want to call.
See the section that begins on page 68 for details.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select Dial.
Chapter 6
Page 105
Tap to select a
different category
Tap a number
to select it
Tap Dial to call
the number
4. Prepare your handheld and mobile phone for data communications. See page 194 for details.
5. Tap Dial.
Tip:
If you select the Enable Tap-Dialing check box in the Contacts Preference dialog box,
you can simply tap the number you want to dial without using the Dial menu command.
Contacts menus
Contacts menus are shown here for your reference, and Contacts features that are not explained
elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 29 for information about choosing menu commands.
The Record and Options menus differ depending on which screen is displayed.
Record menus
Contacts list view
Contacts edit view
Contacts record view
Send Contact
Enables you to send the selected record to someone else via an SMS
message. When you select this command, the Send dialog box opens
where you can select or enter the recipient’s mobile phone number. See
page 208 for more information.
Note:
Page 106
This command appears only if you installed the Palm SMS
application and a phone driver from the Handspring CD-ROM.
Application-Specific Tasks
Options menus
Contacts record & edit views
Contacts list view
Preferences
■
Remember last category. Determines how the Contacts list appears
when you return to it from another application. If you select this check
box, the Contacts list shows the last category you selected. If you clear
it, the Contacts list displays the All category.
■
List By. Determines how the Contact entries are sorted and also
controls the Instant Lookup feature and SMS address lookup options.
■
Enable Tap-Dialing. Toggles the tap-dialing feature on and off. When
enabled, you can dial a phone number from the Contacts list simply by
tapping it. You do not need to select the Dial command from the menu.
Dial Preferences
■
Chapter 6
Dial, Email, SMS. Provides third-party applications access to the
Contacts application’s dialing functions. In most cases you do not need
to change these settings.
Page 107
■
Default country. Determines if North American hyphenation
conventions are automatically applied to phone numbers, and whether
the following two options are available:
■
When dialing, add this area code to 7 digit numbers. Inserts the area
code you specify in front of 7-digit numbers before dialing.
■
Always dial 1 in front of the area code. Inserts a 1 in front of 10-digit
numbers before dialing.
If you select a country other than United States or Canada, numbers
are formatted exactly as they appear in the Contact record.
Rename Custom
Fields
These custom fields appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen. Rename
them to identify the kind of information you enter in them. The names you
give the custom fields appear in all Contacts records.
About Contacts
Page 108
Shows version information for Contacts.
Application-Specific Tasks
To Do List
To Do reminds you of tasks you have to complete. A record in To Do List is called an “item.”
To create a To Do item:
1. Press To Do List
.
2. Enter the text of the To Do item. The text can be longer than one line.
New To
Do item
3. Press a scroll button to deselect the To Do item.
Setting priority
The priority setting for items lets you arrange your To Do items according to their importance or
urgency. The default setting is to arrange To Do items by priority and due date, with priority 1
items at the top. If you have a number of items in your list, changing an item’s priority setting may
move its position in the list.
Note:
When you create a new To Do item, its priority is automatically set to level 1, the highest
(most important) level. If you select another item first, however, the item you create
appears beneath the selected item and is given the same priority as the selected item.
To set the priority of a To Do item:
1. Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do item.
Tap here
Tap to select
priority
2. Tap the Priority number that you want to set (1 is most important).
Setting a due date
You can associate a due date with any To Do item. You can also sort the items that appear in the
list based on their due date.
Chapter 6
Page 109
To set a due date for a To Do item:
1. Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Due Date pick list.
Tap here
4. Tap the date that you want to assign the item:
Today
Assigns the current date.
Tomorrow
Assigns tomorrow’s date.
One week later
Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date.
No Date
Removes the due date from the item.
Choose date
Opens the date selector, where you can choose any date that you
want for the item.
5. Hold Option
Tip:
and press Return
to finish.
If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options dialog, you can tap
directly on the due date in the To Do list to open the pick list shown in step 4.
Assigning a category
You can associate any To Do item with a category. You can also sort the items that appear in the
list based on their category.
To assign a category for a To Do item:
1. Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the category pick list.
Tap here
Page 110
Application-Specific Tasks
4. Tap the category that you want to assign the item.
5. Hold Option
Tip:
and press Return
to finish.
If you turn on the Show Categories option in the To Do Show options dialog, you can tap
directly on the category in the To Do list to assign categories.
Checking off a To Do item
You can check off a To Do item to indicate that you’ve completed it. You can set To Do List to
record the date that you completed the To Do item, and you can choose to show or hide
completed items as described on page 111.
To check off a To Do item do one of the following:
■
Select the item and press Space
to mark it complete.
■
Tap the check box on the left side of the item.
Completed
To Do item
Tip:
To uncheck the selected item, hold Option
and press Space
.
To Do Show Options
The Show Options dialog box enables you to control the appearance of the To Do list screen.
To change the Show Options settings:
1. In To Do list screen, tap Show.
2. Select any of the following settings:
Chapter 6
Page 111
Show
Completed
Items
Displays your completed items in the To Do list screen. If you turn off
this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when you
complete (check) them.
Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off this setting
have not been deleted. They are still in the memory of your handheld.
Purge completed items to remove them from memory.
Show Only Due
Items
Shows only the items that are currently due, past due, or have no due
date specified. When this setting is active, items that are not yet due
do not appear in the list until their due date.
Record
Replaces the due date with the actual date when you complete
Completion Date (check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to an item, the
completion date still records when you complete the item.
Show Due Dates Displays the due dates associated with To Do items and displays an
exclamation mark next to items that remain incomplete after the due
date passes.
Show Priorities
Shows the priority setting for each item.
Show
Categories
Shows the category for each item.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To Do List menus
To Do List menus are shown here for your reference, and To Do List features that are not
explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. See page 33 for information about
choosing menu commands.
Record menu
Send Item
Enables you to send the selected To Do item to someone else via an SMS
message. When you select this command, the Send dialog box opens
where you can select or enter the recipient’s mobile phone number. See
page 208 for more information.
Note:
Page 112
This command appears only if you installed the Palm SMS
application and a phone driver from the Handspring CD-ROM.
Application-Specific Tasks
Options menu
About To Do List Shows version information for To Do List.
Chapter 6
Page 113
Memo Pad
A memo can contain up to 4,000 characters. The number of memos you can store is dependent
only on the memory available on your handheld. A record in Memo Pad is called a “memo.”
To create a new memo:
1. Press Memo Pad
.
2. Enter the text you want to appear in the memo. Press Return
in the memo.
Tip:
to move down to new lines
The first letter of your memo is automatically capitalized.
Tap New
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Reviewing memos
The first line of a memo appears in the Memo list. This makes it easy to locate and review your
memos.
To review a memo:
1. In the Memo list, press the scroll buttons to select the memo you want to view.
2. Press Space
Tip:
to open the selected memo.
You can also tap the text of the memo you want to view in the Memo list.
Tap a memo
to review its
contents
3. Review or edit the text in the memo.
4. Hold Option
Page 114
and press Return
to finish.
Application-Specific Tasks
Memo Pad menus
Memo Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Memo Pad features that are not
explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. See page 33 for information about
choosing menu commands.
The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you’re displaying the Memo list or
an individual memo.
Record menus
Memo list
Send Memo
Memo screen
Enables you to send the selected record to someone else via an SMS
message. When you select this command, the Send dialog box opens
where you can select or enter the recipient’s mobile phone number. See
page 208 for more information.
Note:
This command appears only if you installed the Palm SMS
application and a phone driver from the Handspring CD-ROM.
Options menus
Memo list
Memo screen
Preferences
Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box, where you define the sort
order for memos.
About Memo Pad
Shows version information for Memo Pad.
Chapter 6
Page 115
CityTime
CityTime enables you to display the day and time in your home city and in four other cities around
the globe. Whether you’re travelling or at home, now it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends, and family in far away places.
Note:
CityTime does not automatically update the current time for Daylight Savings Time.
Setting your home city
The home city serves as a point of reference for your other city selections. The information
displayed for all the other cities is based on the day and time in your home city. When you use
CityTime for the first time (or when you travel or move to another city), make sure you set your
home city location. Setting your home city location ensures that CityTime displays accurate
information for the other cities you select.
To set your home city:
1. Press Option
and then press To Do List
Tip:
.
You can also access CityTime by tapping the CityTime icon
Launcher.
2. Press Menu
in the Applications
.
3. Under Options, select Select Home City (/H).
4. Tap the Home City pick list and select the city closest to where you are located.
Tip:
If a nearby city isn’t in the list, you can use the Edit Cities command to add a new city
to the list. See page 117 for details.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Selecting remote cities
In addition to your home city, you can display the day and time for four other cities anywhere
around the globe. These other cities are called remote cities.
To set your remote cities:
1. Tap a pick list in the lower part of the CityTime screen and select the city closest to the city
you want to display.
Tap to select
a remote city
Tip:
Page 116
If a nearby city isn’t in the list, you can use the Edit Cities command to add a new city
to the list. See the next section for details.
Application-Specific Tasks
2. Tap the remaining pick lists and select the other three cities you want to display.
Tip:
You can temporarily display the day and time for any other city by tapping the city’s
location on the map display.
Adding cities
If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can use the Edit Cities command
to add it.
To add a city to the list:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select Edit Cities (/E).
3. Tap New.
4. Enter the city name and other information.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
CityTime menus
CityTime menus are shown here for your reference, and CityTime features that are not explained
elsewhere in this guide are described here. See page 33 for information about choosing menu
commands.
Options menu
About CityTime
Shows version information for CityTime.
Help
Displays online help for the CityTime screens.
Utilities menu
Change Location Opens the Change Location dialog box where you can select the city to
which you are moving or travelling. Changing the location updates the
system time, date, and daylight savings settings.
Sun Rise/Set
Chapter 6
Opens the Sun Rise/Set dialog box where you can view sunrise and
sunset information for your home city. To view this information for another
city, tap the City pick list and select the city from the list. To view this
information for another date, tap the scroll arrows next to the date box.
Page 117
Calculator
Calculator includes two operating modes: Basic and Advanced. In Basic mode you can perform
simple mathematical calculations. Basic mode uses input precedence, like most 4-function
calculators, and the order of the numbers entered results in an answer regardless of operation. In
Advanced mode you can access scientific functions and perform sophisticated math calculations.
The Advanced mode uses algebraic precedence, like most scientific calculators, and the results
differ depending on the rules associated with the algebraic equation. This section explains how
to select the operating mode and use the buttons and menu options available in each mode.
Selecting the Calculator mode
The Toggle Mode command enables you to choose whether you want to work in Basic Calculator
mode or Advanced Calculator mode. You can change modes at any time.
To select the Calculator mode:
1. Press Option
Tip:
and then press Memo Pad
.
You can also access Calculator by tapping the Calculator icon
Launcher.
2. Press Menu
in the Applications
.
3. Under Options, select Toggle Mode (/M).
Tip:
You can also toggle between Basic and Advanced mode by holding Option
repeatedly press Memo Pad
.
and
Using the Basic Calculator buttons
The Basic Calculator includes the following buttons.
Clears the last number you entered. Use this button if you make a mistake while
entering a number in the middle of a calculation. This button enables you to reenter the number without starting the calculation over.
Clears the entire calculation and enables you to begin a fresh calculation.
Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value. If you want to
enter a negative number, enter the number first and then press the +/- button.
Places the current number in memory. Each new number you enter with the M+
button is added to the total already stored in memory. You can add either a
calculated value or a number you enter by pressing the number buttons. Pressing
this button has no effect on the current calculation (or series of calculations); it
merely places the value into memory until it is recalled.
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it in the current calculation.
Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory.
Page 118
Application-Specific Tasks
Displaying Recent Calculations
The Basic Calculator’s Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of
calculations and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain” calculations.
To display recent calculations:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select Recent Calculations (/I).
3. After you finish reviewing the calculations, hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Using the Advanced Calculator mode
The Advanced Calculator screen consists of three regions. Each region performs a different
function to help you perform a variety of calculations.
Tap here
to change
views
View specific buttons
change with view
Primary buttons available in all views
Using the Advanced Calculator buttons
In addition to most of the Basic Calculator buttons, the Primary buttons are available in all the
Advanced Calculator views. The remaining buttons are available only in specific views. The
information that follows provides an overview of the Advanced Calculator functions. For more
detailed information and instructions, visit the website: www.radiks.net/~rhuebner/parendoc.html
Chapter 6
Page 119
Primary buttons
Clears the entire calculation and enables you to begin a fresh calculation.
Clears the last digit you entered. Use this button if you make a mistake while
entering a number in the middle of a calculation. This button enables you to reenter the number without starting the calculation over.
Enters an exponent symbol in the calculation.
Opens the Constants dialog box where you can select a constant to include in the
calculation.
Opens the Store in which memory dialog box where you can select the memory
bank in which you want to store the current value. Advanced Calculator has ten
memory banks.
Opens the Recall which memory dialog box where you can select the memory
bank from which you want to recall a value.
Math buttons
Squares the current value.
Calculates the value of x raised to the y power.
Calculates the value of a common (base 10) antilogarithm.
Calculates the value of a natural (base e) antilogarithm.
Calculates the reciprocal of the current number.
Displays the integer portion of a decimal value.
Calculates the square root of the current number.
Calculates the inverse of x to the y power.
Calculates the common (base 10) logarithm.
Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm.
Displays the remainder of x/y.
Displays the decimal portion of a decimal value.
Page 120
Application-Specific Tasks
Trigonometry buttons
Calculates the sine of the current number.
Calculates the cosine of the current number.
Calculates the tangent of the current number.
Calculates the hyperbolic sine of the current number.
Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of the current number.
Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) sine of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) cosine of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) tangent of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic sine of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic cosine of the current number.
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic tangent of the current number.
Finance buttons
Finance buttons enable you to find an unknown variable value based on a group of known variable
values. For example, to calculate the monthly payment for a 30-year home loan of $100,000 with
an annual interest rate of 8%, you would enter the following variables:
■
Payments/year = 12
■
N = 360 (30 years x 12 months)
■
APR = 8
■
PV = 100,000
■
FV = 0
Using these variables, the answer would be -733.76 per month.
To solve this example:
1. Enter a value and then tap the corresponding variable button. Repeat this process until you’ve
entered the following four variables:
■
N = 360 (30 years x 12 months)
■
APR = 8
Chapter 6
Page 121
■
PV = 100,000
■
FV = 0
2. Enter 12 and tap the P/Yr button to enter the number of payments per year.
3. Tap Edit.
4. Tap the Pmt line and erase all values on the line including zero.
5. Tap Solve.
6. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
You can use a similar process to solve other financial equations by entering four of the variables
to find the value of the fifth variable.
Stores the current number as the total number of payments over the life of the
loan.
Stores the current number as the annual percentage rate of interest.
Stores the current number as the number of payments per year.
Stores the current number as the initial loan amount.
Stores the current number as the payment amount.
Stores the current number as the compounded loan amount including interest.
Opens the Time Value of Money dialog box where you can modify values and solve
the equation.
Stores the remaining balance, interest, and principal (amortization) based on the
supplied values.
Calculates a given percentage of a value. To use this button, enter a value, tap this
button, enter the percent, and then tap the equal sign button.
Calculates the change in a value by a given percentage. To use this button, enter
a value, tap this button, enter the percent, and then tap the equal sign button.
Calculates the percentage of one number relative to another number. To use this
button, enter the first number, tap this button, enter the second number, and then
tap the equal sign button.
Calculates the percentage required to get to one value from another value. To use
this button, enter the result number, tap this button, enter the starting number, and
then tap the equal sign button.
Page 122
Application-Specific Tasks
Logic buttons
Shifts the value to the left and fills the new places with zeros.
Enters D in a hexadecimal calculation.
Enters E in a hexadecimal calculation.
Enters F in a hexadecimal calculation.
Calculates bit-by-bit commonalities between two arguments.
Calculates bit-by-bit unique occurrences in two arguments.
Shifts the sign bit to the right in signed mode.
Enters A in a hexadecimal calculation.
Enters B in a hexadecimal calculation.
Enters C in a hexadecimal calculation.
Calculates the inverse of each bit of the argument.
Calculates the exclusive OR between two arguments.
Statistics buttons
Adds the current value to the end of the statistics memory list. You can store up
to 200 values.
Calculates the mean of the values in the statistics memory list.
Calculates the standard deviation based on a population of n.
Calculates the standard deviation based on a population of n-1.
Calculates the sum of the values in the statistics memory list.
Calculates the square of the sum of the values in the statistics memory list.
Opens the Statistical Data dialog box where you can view, edit, delete, and clear
values in the statistics memory list.
Displays the number of values in the statistics memory list.
Calculates the factorial of any integral from 0 to 170.
Chapter 6
Page 123
Generates a random number between 0 and 32767 and then divides this number
by 32768 to generate a random fraction between 0 and .99997.
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken m at a time.
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken m at a time.
Weight/Temp buttons
Indicates the current value is entered in ounces. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to ounces.
Indicates the current value is entered in pounds. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to pounds.
Indicates the current value is entered in US tons. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to US tons.
Indicates the current value is entered in UK tons. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to UK tons.
Indicates the current value is entered in milligrams. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to milligrams.
Indicates the current value is entered in grams. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to grams.
Indicates the current value is entered in kilograms. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to kilograms.
Indicates the current value is entered in metric tons. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to metric tons.
Indicates the current value is entered in degrees Fahrenheit. When you tap this
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees
Fahrenheit.
Indicates the current value is entered in degrees Kelvin. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees Kelvin.
Indicates the current value is entered in degrees Celsius. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees Celsius.
Length buttons
Indicates the current value is entered in inches. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to inches.
Indicates the current value is entered in feet. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to feet.
Indicates the current value is entered in yards. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to yards.
Indicates the current value is entered in miles. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to miles.
Page 124
Application-Specific Tasks
Indicates the current value is entered in nautical miles. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to nautical miles.
Indicates the current value is entered in millimeters. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to millimeters.
Indicates the current value is entered in centimeters. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to centimeters.
Indicates the current value is entered in meters. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to meters.
Indicates the current value is entered in kilometers. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to kilometers.
Area buttons
Indicates the current value is entered in square inches. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square inches.
Indicates the current value is entered in square feet. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square feet.
Indicates the current value is entered in square yards. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square yards.
Indicates the current value is entered in acres. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to acres.
Indicates the current value is entered in square miles. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square miles.
Indicates the current value is entered in square millimeters. When you tap this
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square
millimeters.
Indicates the current value is entered in square centimeters. When you tap this
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square
centimeters.
Indicates the current value is entered in square meters. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square meters.
Indicates the current value is entered in hectares. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to hectares.
Indicates the current value is entered in square kilometers. When you tap this
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square
kilometers.
Chapter 6
Page 125
Volume buttons
Indicates the current value is entered in teaspoons. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to teaspoons.
Indicates the current value is entered in fluid ounces. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to fluid ounces.
Indicates the current value is entered in cups. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cups.
Indicates the current value is entered in pints. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to pints.
Indicates the current value is entered in quarts. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to quarts.
Indicates the current value is entered in gallons. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to gallons.
Indicates the current value is entered in tablespoons. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to tablespoons.
Indicates the current value is entered in milliliters. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to milliliters.
Indicates the current value is entered in liters. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to liters.
Indicates the current value is entered in cubic inches. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic inches.
Indicates the current value is entered in cubic feet. When you tap this button after
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic feet.
Indicates the current value is entered in cubic meters. When you tap this button
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic meters.
Creating a custom view
You can modify any existing Advanced Calculator view to create your own view. While
customizing a view, you can change the button names as well as the button definitions.
To create a custom view:
1. From the Advanced Calculator screen, press Menu
.
2. Under Program, select Export (/E).
3. Tap the pick list and select the view you want to modify.
4. Tap Export.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
twice.
6. In Memo Pad, open the memo containing the definition you selected in step 3.
7. Modify the definition, and then hold Option
Page 126
and press Return
.
Application-Specific Tasks
8. From the Advanced Calculator screen, press Menu
.
9. Under Program, select Import (/I).
10. Tap the pick list and select the view you modified.
11. Tap Import.
12. Tap Replace to change an existing definition, or tap Add to create an additional definition.
13. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to finish.
Calculator menus
Calculator menus are shown here for your reference, and Calculator features that are not
explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. See page 33 for information about
choosing menu commands.
Options menus
Basic Calculator
Advanced Calculator
About Calculator Shows version information for Calculator.
Program menu
Advanced Calculator
Export
Opens the Export dialog box where you can select a view definition to export
to Memo Pad.
Import
Opens the Import dialog box where you can select a view definition to import
to Memo Pad.
Delete View
Opens the Delete View dialog box where you can delete a user-defined view.
Restore
Defaults
Returns all the view definitions to the preset default values.
Chapter 6
Page 127
Expense
Expense enables you to record the date, expense type, and the amount that you spent. A record
in Expense is called an “item.” You can sort your Expense items into categories or add other
information that you want to associate with the item.
To create an Expense item:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Tap the Expense icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Enter the amount of the expense.
Cursor
of new
item
Tap New
4. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list.
Tap here
Note:
As soon as you select an expense type, your handheld saves the entry. If you don’t select
an expense type, it doesn’t save the entry.
Tip:
A quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no Expense item is
selected in the Expense list, enter the first letter(s) of the expense type, and then enter
the numerical amount. This technique takes advantage of the automatic fill feature. See
the section that begins on page 134 for details.
Changing the date of an Expense item
Initially, Expense items appear with the date you enter them. You can use Expense to change the
date associated with any Expense item.
Page 128
Application-Specific Tasks
To change the date of an Expense item:
1. Tap the Expense item you want to change.
2. Tap the date of the selected item.
Tap date
3. Select the new date.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Entering receipt details
Expense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item. These options appear
in the Receipt Details dialog box.
To open the Receipt Details dialog box:
1. Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details.
2. Tap Details.
3. Select any of the following options:
Category
See the section that begins on page 65 for details.
Type
Opens a pick list of expense types.
Payment
Lets you choose the payment method used to pay the Expense item. If
the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets supplied by your company),
you can choose Prepaid to place your expense in the appropriate
company-paid cell of your printed expense report spreadsheet. See the
section that begins on page 132 for more information.
Chapter 6
Page 129
Currency
Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the Expense
item. The default currency unit is defined in the Preferences dialog (see
page 134). You can also display up to four other common types of
currency. see the next section in this chapter for more information.
Vendor and City
Lets you record the name of the vendor (usually a company) associated
with the expense and the city where the expense was incurred. For
example, a business lunch might be at Rosie's Cafe (Vendor) in San
Francisco (City).
Attendees
See the section that begins on page 71 for details.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Customizing the Currency pick list
You can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency pick list.
To customize the Currency pick list:
1. In the Receipt Details dialog box, tap the Currency pick list and select Edit currencies.
Tap Edit
currencies
2. Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency you want to display on that
line.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to finish.
Defining a custom currency symbol
If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, you can create your own custom
country and currency symbol.
To define a custom currency symbol:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select Custom Currencies. (/Y)
3. Tap one of the four Country boxes.
Page 130
Application-Specific Tasks
Tap a Country box
4. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to appear in Expense.
5. Hold Option
Note:
and press Return
twice to finish.
If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all Expense items,
select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box. If you want to use your custom currency
symbol only for a particular Expense item, select the symbol in the Receipt Details dialog
box associated with that item.
Show Options
Show Options define the sort order and other settings that relate to your Expense items.
To open the Show Options dialog box:
1. In the Expense list, tap Show.
2. Select any of the options.
Tap Show
Sort by
Enables you to sort expense items by date or type.
Distance
Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers.
Show currency
Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 6
and press Return
to finish.
Page 131
Transferring your data to Microsoft Excel
After you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your handheld, you can view and
print the data with your computer.
Note:
You need Microsoft Excel version 5.0 (or later) to view and print your Expense data using
one of the provided templates. Microsoft Excel is not included with the Treo handheld
package. The procedures in this section also assume that you have installed Palm
Desktop software as described on page 24.
Creating or printing an expense report
It is easy to view and print your Expense data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
To create or print an expense report:
1. Perform a HotSync operation to transfer your latest Expense data to your computer.
2. Do one of the following:
■
Click Expense in Palm Desktop software to open Microsoft Excel and the Expense Report
configuration dialog box.
■
From the Windows Start menu, click Programs, Palm Desktop, Expense Reports, and then
choose your user name.
3. Click the expense category that you want.
Click to select
Categories
Tip:
You can press Ctrl+click to select multiple categories. To print the expenses
associated with all of your Expense categories, select All in the Categories group.
4. If you want to define an end date for the expense report, enter the date in the End Date box.
Note:
If you do not specify an end date, all expense entries for the selected categories
appear — up to the date of the last HotSync operation.
5. Do one of the following:
■
Click Print to display the expense report in the Print Preview window, and then click Print
in the Microsoft Excel window to print your expense report.
■
Click Create to display a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing your expense data. Your
data appears in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet form. You can enter information, make
formatting changes, and save and print the file in the normal manner.
Page 132
Application-Specific Tasks
Using expense report templates
Palm Desktop software includes several expense report templates. When you use one of these
templates, you can edit your expense data in Microsoft Excel.
The templates have the extension .xlt and are stored in the template folder in the Palm Desktop
software directory on your computer. To see what a template looks like before you use it, open
the template in Microsoft Excel. For example, the template Sample2.xlt looks like this:
If you want to streamline or customize your expense reports, you can change these templates. For
example, you can add your company name to a template. See Appendix C for information on
changing templates.
Chapter 6
Page 133
To view your expense data using a Microsoft Excel template:
1. Display your expense data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as described in the previous
procedure.
2. Click Options.
Enter name and
other information
Choose expense
template
3. Enter name, department, and other information as necessary for your expense report.
4. Click the Templates menu; then select an expense template.
Note:
If you want to create your own custom expense template and have it appear in the
Templates menu, see Appendix C for more information.
5. Click OK.
Expense menus
Expense menus are shown here for your reference, and Expense features that are not explained
elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 33 for information about choosing menu commands.
Record menu
Options menu
Page 134
Application-Specific Tasks
Preferences
About Expense
Chapter 6
■
Use automatic fill. Lets you select an expense type by entering the first
letter of an expense type. For example, if you enter the letter “T,” it
enters the “Taxi” expense type. Entering “T” and then “E” enters
“Telephone” which is the first expense type beginning with the letters
“TE.”
■
Default currency. Sets the default currency symbol for Expense.
Shows version information for Expense.
Page 135
Page 136
Application-Specific Tasks
Chapter 7
Setting Preferences for
Your Handheld
The Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration options on your Treo™ 90
handheld.
In the Preferences screens, you can do the following:
Buttons
Assign different applications to many of the buttons and icons on your
handheld and the HotSync® cable.
Connection
Configure your handheld to communicate with other devices.
Date & Time
Set the current date and time, the time zone, and daylight savings setting.
Digitizer
Calibrate the screen on your handheld.
Formats
Set the country default and the formats for dates, times, calendar, and
numbers.
General
Set the current date and time, the auto shut-off interval, the Beam Receive
feature, and the system, alarm, and game sounds.
Network
Configure your handheld for use with a wireless data network.
Owner
Assign your name, phone number, and other owner information to your
handheld.
Phone
Assign a Connection profile and phone driver to use when communicating
with a cell phone via IR or a special cable. These settings are used by the Palm
SMS application and the dialing feature in the Contacts application.
ShortCuts
Define a list of abbreviations.
Viewing Preferences
To open the Preferences screens:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Tap the Preferences icon
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
4. Select the Preferences screen you want to view.
Chapter 7
Page 137
Buttons Preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different applications with the
application buttons on the front of your handheld and the HotSync button on the cable. For
example, if you find that you seldom use To Do List and often use CityTime, you can assign the
To Do List button to start CityTime, or any other application on your handheld. Any changes you
make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective immediately; you do not have to
change to a different screen or application. If you assign a different application to a button, you
can still access the original application using the Applications Launcher.
To change the Buttons Preferences:
1. Tap the pick list next to the button or icon you want to re-assign.
Tap arrow to
show pick list
2. Tap the application that you want to assign to the button.
Tip:
To restore all of the buttons to their factory settings, tap Default.
HotSync Buttons Preferences
The HotSync Buttons Preferences screen also enables you to associate a different application
with the button on the HotSync cable. Any changes that you make in the HotSync Buttons dialog
box become effective immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.
To change the HotSync Buttons Preferences:
1. From the Buttons Preferences screen, tap HotSync.
2. Tap the pick list.
Tap arrow to
show pick
list
3. Tap the application that you want to assign to the button.
The default setting for the button is the HotSync setting, which means the cable performs its
normal HotSync functions.
4. Hold Option
Page 138
and press Return
to finish.
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Connection Preferences
The Connection Preferences screen lets you create configurations for communicating with other
hardware devices: PC, Modem, Phone, or Local Network, and the method used to connect to the
device: Cradle/Cable, Infrared, Serial, or USB. Configurations, or profiles, once activated are
available to applications on your handheld.
Connection Types
The Connection Preferences screen displays a list of available configurations that you can modify
as needed. This list varies depending on the software you have added to your handheld.
Standard
Modem
Defines a connection between a modem attached to your handheld and a
modem that is part of your computer or laptop.
Cradle/Cable
Defines the direct serial or USB connection between your handheld and
your desktop computer. It is used to perform a local HotSync operation
when your handheld is connected by a cradle or cable.
IR to PC/
Handheld
Defines a connection between the IR port of your handheld and the
infrared device of your computer or laptop.
IR to Mobile
Phone
Defines a connection between the IR port of your handheld and a mobile
phone with an IR port.
Cable to
Mobile Phone
Defines a connection between your handheld and a mobile phone, using a
special cable designed to match your phone.
Serial to
Modem
Defines a connection between a modem attached to the serial connector
of your handheld and a modem that is part of your computer or laptop.
Verizon QNC
Defines a connection between your handheld and mobile phone that
connects to the Internet using the Verizon Quick Connect feature.
The following steps provide an example of how to define the Connection Preferences settings. In
this example we illustrate how to create a connection that would enable you to use infrared
communication between your handheld and your computer.
To create an IR to PC/Handheld connection:
1. In the Connection Preferences screen, tap New.
2. Enter a name for this configuration.
3. Tap the Connect to pick list and select PC.
4. Tap the Via pick list and select Infrared.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 7
and press Return
to finish.
Page 139
Date & Time Preferences
The Date & Time Preferences screen enables you to set the time, date, time zone, and daylight
savings setting for your handheld. See the section that begins on page 21 for information on
changing these settings.
Digitizer Preferences
The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. This is the same screen
that appears when you start your handheld for the first time. You can recalibrate your screen after
a hard reset, or if your digitizer accuracy changes over time.
Formats Preferences
Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the display format of the
dates, times, and numbers on your handheld.
Country default
The country default sets date, time, week start day, and number conventions based on geographic
regions where you might use your handheld. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is
expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock
with an AM or PM suffix.
All your handheld applications use the Country default settings. See the next section in this
chapter for information on customizing these settings.
To set the country default:
1. Tap the country name pick list.
2. Tap the setting you want to use.
Page 140
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats
The Time setting defines the format for the time of day. The time format that you select appears
in all applications on your handheld.
To select the time, date, week start, and numbers format:
1. Tap the Time pick list and select a format.
2. Tap the Date pick list and select a format.
3. Tap the Week starts pick list, and select whether you want the first day of the week to be
Sunday or Monday.
Note:
This setting controls the Day, Week, Month, Year, and List views in Date Book Plus
and all other aspects of your handheld that display a calendar.
4. Tap the Numbers pick list, and select formats for the decimal point and thousands separator.
General Preferences
The General Preferences screen enables you to set the auto shutoff interval, sounds for your
handheld, the alarm LED, and the beam receive feature.
Auto-off delay
Your handheld has an automatic shutoff feature that turns off the power after a period of
inactivity. This feature conserves battery power if you forget to turn off your handheld. If you find
that your handheld shuts itself off before you finish viewing information on the screen, increase
the auto-off setting.
To set the Auto-off delay:
1. Tap the Auto-off After pick list.
2. Tap the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2
minutes, or 3 minutes.
Chapter 7
Page 141
System, alarm, and game sounds
Your handheld uses a variety of sounds. The System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings enable
you to turn the sounds on or off, to adjust the volume level, and to turn the Alarm LED option on
and off.
To set the system, alarm, and game sounds:
1. Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level.
Note:
When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the “chime” tones associated
with the HotSync operation.
2. Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level.
3. Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On if you want the LED to blink for two minutes when
an alarm goes off, or select Off if you don’t want the LED to blink.
4. Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level.
Note:
The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to respond to
this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting.
Network Preferences and TCP/IP software
Network Preferences let you set a password, telephone number, DNS number, IP address, as well
as create a login script for remote connections. For example, if you have a data-enabled mobile
phone and want to use the modem inside the phone to connect to the Internet. TCP/IP provides
the ability to connect to your ISP or dial-in server with applications that allow you to view the
transmitted data.
To use TCP/IP software, you must first configure the Connection Preferences and then the
Network Preferences settings. After you configure both of these Preferences, you can establish
a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol), SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol), or CSLIP (Compressed
Serial Line Internet Protocol) connection with your ISP or dial-in server. You can do this either by
using menu commands from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party
application.
Selecting a service
Use the Service setting to select the service template for your ISP or a dial-in server. Service
templates are a set of ISP and dial-in server configuration settings that you can create, save, and
reuse.
Page 142
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To select a service:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
Tap here to display a list
of service templates
2. Tap the predefined service template.
Note:
If you want to enter a name for a new service template, see page 147 for details.
Entering a user name
The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log into your Internet Service
Provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain multiple lines of text, only two lines
appear onscreen.
To enter a user name:
1. Tap the User Name field.
2. Enter your user name.
Enter your user name
here
Note:
Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the user name.
Chapter 7
Page 143
Entering a password
The Password box identifies the password you use to log into your server or ISP. Your entry in
this field determines whether your handheld prompts you to enter a password each time you log
into your network:
■
If you do not enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Prompt” in this field and asks
you to enter a password during the login procedure.
■
If you enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Assigned” in this field and does not
prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure.
Note:
If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do not enter a
password.
To enter a password:
1. Tap the Password field.
2. Enter the password you use to log into your server.
Enter password here
Tap here
3. Hold Option
Note:
and press Return
to finish.
The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”
Selecting a connection
The Connection Preferences settings tell your handheld about the hardware you are using for
remote data connections. For example, you can use a data-enabled mobile phone with an IR port
or a special cable to connect the phone to your handheld. See the section that begins on page
139 for details on how to configure Connection Preferences.
To select a connection:
1. Tap the Connection pick list.
The list displays the configurations in your Connection Preferences panel.
Page 144
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Tap to display a list of
connection configurations
2. Select the appropriate Connection.
Adding telephone settings
When you select the Phone field, your handheld opens a dialog box in which you define the
telephone number you use to connect with your ISP or dial-in server. In addition, you can also
define a prefix, disable Call Waiting, and give special instructions for using a calling card.
Note:
The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long-distance services.
However, because MCI works differently, MCI customers need to put the calling card
number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field.
To enter your server phone number:
1. Tap the Phone field.
2. Enter the phone number you use to reach your ISP or dial-in server.
Enter your ISP phone
number here
3. If you need to enter a prefix or disable Call Waiting, skip to those procedures. Otherwise, hold
Option
and press Return
to finish.
Entering a prefix
A prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line. For
example, many offices require that you dial “9” to dial a number outside the building.
Chapter 7
Page 145
To enter a prefix:
1. Tap the Dial Prefix check box to select it.
Select this
box if you
need to use
a prefix
Enter your
prefix here
2. Enter the prefix.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Disabling Call Waiting
Call Waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are connected. If
your telephone has Call Waiting, you need to disable this feature before logging into your ISP or
dial-in server.
To disable Call Waiting:
1. Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it.
Select this
box if you
need to
disable Call
Waiting
Enter your disable
code here
2. Enter the code to disable Call Waiting on the Disable call waiting line.
Note:
Each telephone company assigns a code to disable Call Waiting. Contact your local
telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Using a calling card
The Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or Intranet
server. Keep in mind that there is usually a delay before you enter your calling card number. When
you define your calling card number, you need to add commas at the beginning to compensate
for this delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds.
Page 146
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To use a calling card:
1. Tap the Use calling card check box to select it.
Select this
box to use a
calling card
Enter your
calling card
number here
2. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line.
Note:
It’s a good idea to add at least three commas at the beginning of your calling card
number to compensate for the cue delay.
Tip:
MCI customers must enter the calling card number in the Phone # field, and the
phone number in the Use Calling Card field.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Connecting to your service
After you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your
Internet Service Provider (ISP) or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.
To establish a connection:
■
Tap Connect to dial the current service and display the Service Connection Progress
messages.
Tip:
To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the bottom scroll
button.
To close a connection:
■
Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your handheld and your service.
Creating additional service templates
You can create additional service templates from scratch or by duplicating existing templates and
editing information. After you create a new or duplicate template, you can add and edit settings.
To add a new service template:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Service, select New (/N).
A new service template (called Untitled) is added to the Service pick list.
Chapter 7
Page 147
To duplicate an existing service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Tap the predefined service template you want to duplicate.
3. Press Menu
.
4. Under Service, select Duplicate (/L).
A copy of the service template is added to the Service pick list.
Adding detailed information to a service template
If you are using one of the predefined service templates, you probably only need to enter your
user name and telephone number. If you are creating a new service template, you may need to
provide additional information to your ISP or dial-in server. You use the Details dialog box to add
additional information to a selected service template.
To select a connection type:
1. Tap the service field.
2. Tap Details.
Select connection type
3. Tap the Connection type pick list and select one of the following connection types:
PPP
Point-to-Point protocol
SLIP
Serial Line Internet Protocol
CSLIP
Compressed Serial Line Internet Protocol
Note:
If you are not sure, try PPP; if that doesn’t work, ask your Internet Service Provider or your
System Administrator for the correct connection type.
Page 148
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Idle timeout
The Idle timeout setting defines how long your handheld waits before dropping the connection
with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of a TCP/IP application.
To set the Idle timeout:
1. Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options:
1 minute
Waits one minute for you to open another application before it drops the
connection.
2 minutes
Waits two minutes.
3 minutes
Waits three minutes.
Never
Keeps your PPP or SLIP connection until you turn off your handheld (or until it
times out). See page 141 for information on the Auto-off delay setting.
2. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Defining primary and secondary DNS
The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating the names of
host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or IP address), you are
identifying a specific server that handles the translation services.
Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details dialog box, you enter each
section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a number from 0 to 255; numbers
are the only allowable characters in this field.
Ask your Internet Service Provider or System Administrator for the correct Primary or Secondary
DNS IP numbers.
Note:
Most Internet Service Providers automatically provide DNS information. Leave the Query
DNS option checked unless you are certain you need to manually enter DNS information.
To enter a primary and secondary DNS:
1. Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it.
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, and then enter the first
section of the IP address.
Note:
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Repeat step 2 for the second, third, and last sections of the Primary DNS field.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Secondary DNS number.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 7
and press Return
to finish.
Page 149
IP address
Everyone who logs on to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP address), whether
permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address when clients
log in. The IP Address field lets you identify whether your network provides automatic (dynamic)
temporary IP addressing.
Note:
Most Internet Service Providers automatically assign IP addresses. Leave the Automatic
IP Address option checked unless you are certain you need to manually enter IP address
information.
To identify dynamic IP addressing:
■
Tap the IP Address check box to select it.
Tap to select
automatic IP
address
To enter a permanent IP address:
1. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent IP address field below
the check box.
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period then enter the first section of the IP address.
Note:
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Creating a login script
A login script is a series of commands, similar to an autoexec.bat file, that automates logging into
your ISP. You can create login script files by selecting commands from the Command pick list in
the Login Script dialog. Some commands from the Command pick list, such as Send, require you
to supply additional information. Those commands have a parameter field so that you can add the
necessary data.
Note:
You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login script. See Appendix D
for more information.
To create a login script:
1. Tap Script.
2. Tap the End pick list.
Page 150
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Tap here
3. Tap the command you want from the Command list. If the command requires additional
information, a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the information. The following
commands are available:
Wait For
Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the TCP/IP server
before executing the next command.
Wait For
Prompt
Detects a challenge-response prompt from the server and displays a
dynamically generated challenge value. When you enter the challenge value
into your token card, this generates a response value for you to enter on your
handheld. This command takes two arguments, separated by a vertical bar (|)
on the input line.
Send
Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you are
connecting.
Send CR
Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server to which you
are connecting.
Send User ID
Transmits the User ID information entered in the User ID field of the Network
Preferences screen.
Send
Password
Transmits the password entered in the Password field of the Network
Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password, this command prompts
you to enter one. The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR
command.
Delay
Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before executing
the next command in the login script.
Get IP
Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld. This
command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt
Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter text of some kind (for example,
a password or a security code).
End
Identifies the last line in the login script.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.
5. Hold Option
Chapter 7
and press Return
to finish.
Page 151
Deleting a service template
There is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete command from the Service
menu.
To delete a service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Tap the service template you want to delete.
3. Press Menu
.
4. Under Service, select Delete (/D).
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Network Preferences menu commands
The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to create
and edit service templates. TCP/IP application menus are show here for your reference.
See page 33 for more information about choosing menu commands.
Service menu
Options menu
TCP/IP troubleshooting
If you are having a problem establishing a network connection using TCP/IP, check this section
and try the suggestions listed.
Displaying expanded Service Connection Progress messages
It’s helpful to identify at what point in the login procedure the connection fails. An easy way to do
this is to display the expanded Service Connection Progress messages. Expanded Service
Connection Progress messages describe the current stage of the login procedure. Press the
bottom scroll button at any point during login to display these messages.
Viewing the Network Log
If viewing the expanded Service Connection Progress messages does not give you enough
information to find out why you cannot connect to your ISP or dial-in server, take a look at the
Network Log. The Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs between your handheld
and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the Network Log can help
your ISP or your System Administrator pinpoint where the login procedure communication fails
and why.
Page 152
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To view the Network Log:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select View Log (/V).
3. Use the scroll buttons to see the entire Network Log.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Adding a DNS number
If your ISP or dial-in server requires a DNS number and you did not enter that information in the
Network Preferences screen, it will appear that you successfully logged into your network. When
you try to use an application or look up information, however, the connection fails. If this occurs,
try adding a DNS number. Ask your ISP or your System Administrator for the correct Primary and
Secondary DNS IP numbers.
Owner Preferences
The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name, phone number, or
any other information that you want to associate with your handheld.
If you use the Security application to turn off and lock your handheld with a password, information
that you put in the Owner Preferences displays the next time you turn on your handheld.
To enter the Owner Preferences:
■
Enter the text that you want to associate with your handheld in the Owner Preferences
screen. If you enter more text than can fit on one screen, a scroll bar automatically appears
on the right side of the screen.
If you assign a password with the Security application, the information in the Owner Preferences
screen cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button appears at the bottom of the screen.
To unlock the Owner Preferences screen:
1. Tap Unlock.
2. Enter the password that you defined in the Security application.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 7
and press Return
to finish.
Page 153
Phone Preferences
The Phone Preferences screen enables you to assign a Connection profile to applications, such
as Palm SMS, that must be used in conjunction with your mobile phone.
To set Phone Preferences:
1. From the Connection pick list, select the configuration for you mobile phone.
Note:
If you do not see a Connection that is specific to your phone, select Infrared to GSM
Phone if you connect to your phone via the IR port, or select Serial to GSM Phone if
you connect to your phone with a cable.
2. Align your handheld’s IR port with the IR port on your mobile phone, or connect your handheld
to your phone via a special cable (sold separately).
3. Tap Test to confirm that the configuration works properly.
ShortCuts Preferences
The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering text. This
section describes how to create, edit, and delete a ShortCut. See page 33 for information on the
use of ShortCuts.
Creating a ShortCut
You can create a ShortCut for any words, letters, or numbers. All ShortCuts you create appear on
the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are available in any of your handheld
applications and are backed up on your computer when you perform a HotSync operation.
To create a ShortCut:
1. Tap New.
2. On the ShortCut name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the ShortCut.
Tap New
3. Tap the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when you type the
ShortCut characters.
Tip:
You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your ShortCut
text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
4. Hold Option
Tip:
Page 154
and press Return
to finish.
To use a ShortCut, enter the ShortCut symbol followed by the ShortCut characters.
See page 33 for details.
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Editing a ShortCut
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
To edit a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Make the changes you want.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Deleting a ShortCut
If you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.
To delete a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 7
and press Return
for Yes.
Page 155
Page 156
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Chapter 8
Advanced HotSync® Operations
HotSync® Manager enables you to synchronize data between one or more Palm OS® devices and
Palm™ Desktop software or another PIM such as Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you
must connect your Treo™ 90 handheld and your desktop software either directly, by connecting
your handheld to the HotSync cable attached to your computer or using infrared communication,
or indirectly, with using an optional modem, or a network.
This chapter describes how to select HotSync options and perform a HotSync operation via the
infrared port, an optional modem, or a network. See page 76 for information about performing
your first and subsequent local HotSync operations.
Selecting HotSync setup options
You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, you can adjust the local
and modem HotSync settings as well.
To set the HotSync options:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
 in the Windows system tray.
2. Choose Setup.
3. Click the General tab and select one of the following options:
Always available
Chapter 8
Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and constantly monitors
the communication port for synchronization requests from your
handheld. With this option, the HotSync Manager synchronizes data
even when Palm Desktop software is not running.
Page 157
Available only
when Palm
Desktop software
is running
Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests automatically when you
open Palm Desktop software.
Manual
Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager from the
Start menu.
Tip:
If you’re not sure which option to use, keep the default setting: Always available.
4. Click the Local tab to display the settings for the connection between your computer and the
HotSync cable, and adjust the following options as needed.
Serial Port
Identifies the port that your desktop software uses to communicate with the
optional serial HotSync cable. This selection should match the number of the
port to which you connected the optional cable.
Note:
Speed
Your handheld cannot share this port with an internal modem or other
device.
Determines the speed at which data is transferred between your handheld
and your desktop software. Try the As Fast As Possible rate first, and adjust
downward if you experience problems. This setting allows your desktop
software and your handheld to find and use the fastest speed.
5. Click the Modem tab to display the modem settings and adjust the options as needed. See
page 164 for more information.
6. If you are attached to a network, click the Network tab to display the network settings and
adjust the options as needed. See page 168 for more information.
7. Click OK.
Page 158
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Customizing HotSync application settings
For each application, you can define a set of options that determines how records are handled
during synchronization. These options are called a “conduit.” By default, a HotSync operation
synchronizes all files between the handheld and your desktop software.
In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only reason you might want
to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your handheld or your desktop software,
or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of file because you don’t use it.
In addition to the conduits for the applications on your handheld, HotSync Manager includes
System and Install conduits. The System conduit backs up the system information stored on your
handheld, including keyboard ShortCuts. The Install conduit installs applications on your
handheld.
To customize HotSync application settings:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
taskbar).
Tip:
in the Windows system tray (bottom-right corner of the
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu bar.
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom.
3. Select the appropriate user name from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
5. Click Change.
Chapter 8
Page 159
6. Click the direction in which you want to write data, or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer
for an application.
Note:
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a
new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set As Default box. Thereafter, whatever
you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default button in the
Custom dialog.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9. Click Done to activate your settings.
IR HotSync operations
Your handheld is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that supports the IrCOMM implementation
of the standards for infrared communication established by the Infrared Data Association (IrDA).
This means that you can beam data to any other device that supports the IrCOMM implementation
of the IrDA standards. Most importantly, you can use the IR port to perform HotSync operations.
When you use the IR port on your handheld to perform HotSync operations, you don’t need your
HotSync cable. You simply enable infrared communication on your computer and your handheld
and then perform an IR HotSync operation. So there’s no need to carry your cable when you’re
on the road with an infrared-enabled laptop.
Preparing your computer for infrared communication
To perform an IR HotSync operation, the computer you want to synchronize with must have an
enabled infrared port or be connected to an infrared device that supports the IrCOMM
implementation of the IrDA standards.
Desktop computers are likely to require an infrared device attached to a physical COM port.
Laptops are likely to have a built-in IR port. Your computer must also have an installed infrared
driver.
Does your computer support infrared communication?
If your computer uses Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP,
infrared communication is built into the operating system. Some versions of Windows 95 also
have built-in infrared communication. If you are using another type of computer, check the
documentation that came with your computer to see if it supports infrared communication.
To check the ports used for infrared communication with Windows 98 and Me:
1. In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Infrared icon.
Note:
If you do not see the Infrared icon, you need to install an infrared driver.
3. Click the Options tab.
Page 160
Advanced HotSync® Operations
4. Select Enable infrared communication.
Infrared
ports
The COM port displayed on this screen is the port associated with your infrared device. It
should be different from the port currently defined for cable synchronization.
5. Write down the port listed as “Providing application support” so you can configure HotSync
Manager for infrared communication.
This port is the simulated port. It is the channel through which the actual infrared communication takes place between your computer and your handheld.
6. Deselect all other check boxes in the Options tab.
7. Click Apply and then click OK.
To enable infrared communication with Windows 2000 and Windows XP:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
taskbar).
in the Windows system tray (bottom-right corner of the
2. Choose Exit to close HotSync Manager.
3. In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Wireless Link icon.
5. Click the Image Transfer tab and deselect the Use Wireless Link to transfer images from a
digital camera to your computer check box.
Chapter 8
Page 161
6. Click OK.
7. Disable any other application that opens the IR port.
Configuring HotSync Manager for infrared communication
Next you need to go to the HotSync Manager and configure it for infrared communication. In
Windows 98 and Me, you need to specify the simulated port used for infrared communication. In
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, you simply need to activate the infrared menu item.
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication with Windows 98 and Me:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray.
2. Make sure Local Serial is checked on the menu.
3. Choose Setup.
4. Click the Local tab.
5. In the Serial Port list, select the simulated port used for infrared communication. See the
previous section for instructions on identifying the simulated port.
6. Click OK.
Page 162
Advanced HotSync® Operations
The HotSync Manager is now communicating with the simulated port defined for infrared
communication.
Note:
You cannot use your cable again until you reconfigure the HotSync Manager to
communicate with the port defined for cable synchronization.
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication with Windows 2000
and Windows XP:
1. If necessary, start HotSync Manager.
2. Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray.
3. Choose InfraRed from the HotSync Manager menu.
Performing an IR HotSync operation
After you complete the steps to prepare for an IR HotSync operation it is easy to perform the
actual operation.
To perform an IR HotSync operation:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
3. Press Return
.
to launch the application.
4. Tap Local.
5. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
6. Position your handheld’s IR port within a couple of inches of your computer’s infrared port.
7. Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation.
Chapter 8
Page 163
Returning to serial cable HotSync operations
It’s easy to return to using the cable for HotSync operations.
Note:
If you’re using a USB cable and the Local USB option is already selected on the HotSync
Manager menu, you don’t need to do anything to return to cable operations.
To return to serial cable HotSync operations with Windows 98 and Me:
1. If needed, connect the cable to your computer.
2. Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray.
3. Choose Setup, and then click Local.
4. In the Serial Port list, select the COM port where your cable is connected.
5. Click OK.
To disable infrared communication with Windows 2000 and Windows XP:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray.
2. Uncheck InfraRed on the menu.
3. In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Wireless Link icon.
5. Click the Image transfer tab, and select the Use Wireless Link to transfer images from a
digital camera to your computer check box.
The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation just press the HotSync button on the
cable. You can leave the HotSync application on your handheld set to perform IR HotSync
operations and still use the cable. This is useful if you perform HotSync operations with both your
desktop computer and a laptop. When you are in the office just connect your handheld to the
cable and press the HotSync button. When you travel, you don’t have to carry a cable.
Conducting a modem HotSync operation
You can use a modem to synchronize your handheld when you are away from your computer. The
modem can be located on an expansion card, or inside a mobile phone that you connect to your
handheld.
Note:
The first HotSync operation must be local, using the cable. After that, you can perform a
modem HotSync operation.
To perform a modem HotSync operation you must complete the following steps:
■
Connect a modem to your computer
■
Configure HotSync Manager for use with your modem
■
Connect a modem to your handheld
■
Configure the Modem Preferences on your handheld for use with your modem
Page 164
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Preparing your computer
There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your computer for a modem HotSync
operation. Be sure to perform these steps before you leave your office so that your computer is
ready to receive a call from your handheld.
To prepare your computer for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on, and that no communications
applications, such as fax or telephony software, are running on a COM port.
Note:
Make sure the computer is disconnected from all online services, such as America
Online (AOL) and CompuServe. This helps to avoid conflicts with the COM port.
2. Start HotSync Manager if it is not already running, and from the HotSync Manager menu,
choose Modem.
3. Adjust the following options as needed.
Serial Port
Identifies the port for the modem. If you are unsure of the port assignment,
look at the Modem Properties in the Windows Control Panel.
Speed
Determines the speed at which data is transferred. Try the As Fast As
Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you experience problems. This
setting allows your desktop software and your handheld to find and use
the fastest speed.
Modem
Identifies the modem type or manufacturer. Refer to your modem manual
or face plate for its type or settings. If you’re not sure of your modem type
or your modem doesn’t match any that appear in the list, select Hayes
Basic.
Setup String
Identifies the setup string for your particular modem. Not all modems
require a setup string. Refer to your modem manual and enter the setup
string if recommended by the manufacturer.
4. Click OK.
Chapter 8
Page 165
Preparing your handheld
There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your handheld for a modem HotSync
operation.
To prepare your handheld for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
3. Press Return
.
to launch the application.
4. Tap Modem.
5. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select Standard Modem.
6. Tap the Enter Phone # field.
Note:
If you plan to connect to your company’s dial-in server (network modem) instead of
connecting to a computer modem, see page 168.
7. Enter the telephone number to access the modem connected to your computer.
8. If needed, enter a dial prefix (such as “9”) to access an outside line, and then tap the Dial
Prefix check box.
Tip:
You can enter a comma in the field to introduce a “pause” in the dialing sequence.
Each comma equals a two second pause.
9. Select the Disable call waiting check box to avoid an interruption during the modem HotSync
operation.
10. If you want to use a calling card to place the call, select the check box and enter the calling
card number.
11. Hold Option
Page 166
and press Return
to finish.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation
The Conduit Setup dialog box on your handheld enables you to define which files and/or
applications synchronize during a modem HotSync operation. You can use these settings to
minimize the time required for modem synchronization.
To change the Conduit Setup for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
3. Press Return
4. Press Menu
.
to launch the application.
.
5. Under Options, select Conduit Setup (/D).
6. Tap the check boxes to deselect the files and applications that you do not want to synchronize
during a modem HotSync operation. The default setting is to synchronize all files.
Note:
Applications that do not have a database (such as games) do not synchronize — even
if you select the item in the Conduit Setup dialog box.
7. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Performing a modem HotSync operation
After you prepare your computer and your handheld, and select your Conduit Setup options, you
are ready to perform a modem HotSync operation.
To perform a modem HotSync operation:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
3. Press Return
.
to launch the application.
4. Tap the Modem icon
to dial the desktop modem and synchronize the applications.
5. Wait for the HotSync operation to finish. If you have any problems conducting a successful
HotSync operation, see Appendix B.
Chapter 8
Page 167
Conducting a HotSync operation via a network
When you use the Network HotSync software, you can take advantage of the Local Area Network
(LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN) connectivity available in many office environments. The
Network HotSync software enables you to perform a HotSync operation by using the WAN to
dial-in to a network or by using a cable that is connected to any computer on your LAN (provided
that the computer connected to the cable also has the Network HotSync software installed, your
computer is on, and the HotSync Manager is running).
Connecting to your company’s dial-in server
The Network HotSync software requires the following:
■
Your computer has TCP/IP support installed.
■
Both your company’s network system and its remote access server support TCP/IP. (Your
System Administrator has this information.)
■
You have a remote access account. (If you don’t have an account, consult your System
Administrator.)
Everything you need to connect to your company’s dial-in server (network modem) is included
with HotSync Manager and the software on your handheld. You need to activate the feature,
however, in HotSync Manager and on your handheld.
To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
taskbar).
in the Windows system tray (bottom-right corner of the
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Network.
Note:
To perform a Network HotSync from another computer on your network, you must
select Network from the HotSync Manager menu on both your primary computer and
the computer you want to use.
3. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Setup.
4. Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a check mark next to it. If the check
mark is not there, click the check box next to your user name.
Page 168
Advanced HotSync® Operations
5. Click OK.
6. Connect your handheld to the cable and press the HotSync button.
The HotSync operation records network information about your computer on your handheld.
With this information, your handheld can locate your computer when you perform a HotSync
operation over the network.
To prepare your handheld for a dial-in network HotSync operation:
Note: If you are performing a network HotSync operation via a LAN, you do not need to prepare
your handheld and can skip to page 170.
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
3. Press Return
4. Press Menu
.
to launch the application.
.
5. Under Options, select Modem Sync Prefs (/O).
6. Tap Network.
7. Hold Option
Note:
and press Return
to finish.
See the section that begins on page 142 for information on configuring Network
HotSync preferences.
Performing a dial-in network HotSync operation
You are ready to perform a dial-in network HotSync operation after you prepare your computer
and handheld, and select your Conduit Setup options.
To perform a dial-in network HotSync operation:
1.
Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the HotSync icon
Chapter 8
.
Page 169
3. Press Return
to launch the application.
4. Tap the modem HotSync icon to begin the operation.
Performing a network HotSync operation via a LAN
You are ready to perform a network HotSync from another computer on your network after you
select Network from the HotSync Manager menu on both your primary computer and the
computer you want to use for the network HotSync operation.
To perform a network HotSync operation via a LAN:
1. Connect your handheld to a HotSync cable that is connected to a computer on the LAN.
2. Press the HotSync button on the cable.
HotSync Manager finds your primary computer on the LAN and synchronizes with the data on
your primary computer.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to import PhoneBook and Memo Pad information onto your
handheld from a separate external file such as a company phone list. HotSync Manager stores
the data in a separate category on your Palm Desktop software and your handheld. You can
configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you perform a
HotSync operation.
With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following formats:
■
Comma delimited (.csv)
■
Tab delimited (.tsv)
■
Memo Pad archive (.mpa)
■
Address archive (.aba)
■
Text (.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
Note:
Page 170
To use this feature, you must use Palm Desktop software as your PIM software.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Creating a user profile
If you need to configure several Palm OS® handhelds with specific information (such as a
company phone list) before distributing them to their actual users, you can create a user profile
to load the data into a handheld without associating that data with a user name. The User Profile
feature is designed only for the first-time HotSync operation, before you assign a User ID to a
particular handheld.
To create a user profile:
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Users.
3. Click Profiles.
4. Click New.
5. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each profile that you want to create, and then click OK to return to
Palm Desktop software.
7. Select the profile from the User list and create the data for the profile (e.g., company phone
list, etc.).
Chapter 8
Page 171
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation:
1. Connect the new handheld to the HotSync cable.
2. Press the HotSync button on the cable.
3. Click Profiles.
4. Select the profile that you want to load on the handheld, and click OK.
5. Click Yes to transfer all the profile data to the handheld.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign
a user name to the handheld.
Synchronizing with your
desktop e-mail application
Palm™ Mail is an application that lets you synchronize with the e-mail application on your desktop
computer. You can read, reply to, compose, and delete e-mail on your handheld. To send or
receive e-mail, you simply perform a HotSync operation either locally, using the HotSync cable or
the infrared port on your handheld, or remotely, using an optional modem or a network as
described earlier in this chapter.
The key to Palm Mail is that it truly synchronizes the mail in the Inbox of your desktop e-mail
application with the mail on your handheld. For example, if you delete e-mail items from Palm Mail,
your next HotSync operation also deletes the e-mail items from your desktop e-mail application,
so you never have to delete e-mail items twice. Similarly, if you read an e-mail item on your
handheld and leave it in your Inbox, your next HotSync operation marks it as read in your desktop
e-mail application.
In Palm Mail, you can do the following:
■
View, delete, file, and reply to incoming mail.
■
Create outgoing e-mail items and drafts of e-mail items.
■
Create simple or complex filters, which allow you to decide the type of e-mail that your
handheld retrieves from your desktop E-mail application.
■
Use your handheld and its HotSync cable or with infrared communication to send and retrieve
e-mail items from your desktop e-mail application.
Page 172
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Preparing your computer to synchronize desktop e-mail
Before you use Palm Mail for the first time, make sure your desktop e-mail application is up and
running. You must also set up Palm Desktop software for use with your desktop e-mail
application.
Palm Mail supports a number of Windows desktop e-mail applications, such as Microsoft Outlook
(version 4.0 or higher), QUALCOMM Eudora (version 3.0.3 or higher), and Lotus cc:Mail (versions
2.5, 6.0, and 7.0). You can see the full list of the supported applications when you set up Palm
Mail.
If your desktop e-mail application does not appear on the list, you may still be able to manage your
desktop e-mail application from your handheld by means of special connection software, called a
conduit, that lets you synchronize your desktop e-mail application and your handheld. Contact the
vendor of your e-mail application or visit the web site www.handspring.com for more information.
Note:
The following instructions assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop software
on your computer and that you did not set up Palm Mail during the installation. If you have
not yet installed Palm Desktop software, install it now.
To set up Palm Mail:
1. Click Start in the Windows taskbar.
2. Highlight Programs, highlight Handspring (or Palm), and then click Mail Setup to begin setup.
3. Follow the instructions onscreen to set up your handheld for use with your desktop e-mail
application.
To select HotSync options:
1. Click the HotSync icon
 in the Windows system tray (bottom-right corner of the taskbar).
2. Choose Custom.
Tip:
You can also choose Custom from the HotSync menu in Palm Desktop software.
3. Select Mail in the list box.
4. Click Change.
Chapter 8
Page 173
5. Click one of the following settings:
Synchronize
the files
Synchronizes the mail on your handheld and your desktop e-mail application.
Desktop
overwrites
handheld
Replaces the mail on your handheld with the mail in your desktop e-mail
application. You should use this option only if, for some reason, the two
inboxes get out of sync. This setting applies for only one HotSync operation
and then reverts back to the default setting.
Do Nothing
Turns off communication between your handheld and desktop e-mail
application. This setting applies for only one HotSync operation and then
reverts back to the default setting.
Set As
Default
Changes the default setting on an ongoing basis. (When you first set up Palm
Mail, Synchronize the files is the default setting.)
Tip:
To turn off Palm Mail, select Do Nothing and then select the Set As Default check box.
To change your Palm Mail setup options:
1. Click the HotSync icon
in the Windows system tray.
2. Choose Custom.
Tip:
You can also choose Custom from the HotSync menu in Palm Desktop software.
3. Select Mail in the list box.
4. Click Change.
5. Modify your settings as needed.
6. Click OK.
Using Palm Mail on your handheld
After you enable and configure Palm Mail, perform a HotSync operation to synchronize Palm Mail
with your desktop e-mail application. The following section explains how to use Palm Mail on your
handheld.
To open Palm Mail:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the Mail icon
3. Press Return
Page 174
to access the Applications Launcher.
.
to launch the application.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Viewing e-mail items
The Message list displays a list of your incoming e-mail items, who sent them, and the date they
were received. E-mail items you’ve read have a check next to them. High-priority e-mail items
appear in bold.
Previously read
To open an e-mail item:
1. Use the scroll buttons to select the message you want to open.
2. Press Space
to open it.
Header mode icons
Recipient
Sender
Subject
Time and date sent
E-mail body
To close an e-mail item:
■
Hold Option
and press Return
to close the e-mail item.
Displaying full header information
By default, Palm Mail displays abbreviated header information, which comprises only the From:
and Subj: fields. The full header provides complete information about the sender, receiver, and
copied recipients, in addition to the subject and date the e-mail item was created. Palm Mail uses
the header type you select for all your e-mail items.
To display full header information:
1. Open an e-mail item.
2. Tap the Complete Header icon.
Tip:
To redisplay the abbreviated header, tap the Abbreviated Header icon.
Chapter 8
Page 175
Creating e-mail items
You create e-mail items with your handheld the same way you create e-mail with your desktop
E-mail application: you identify the recipient(s) of the e-mail item, define a subject, and create the
body of the e-mail item.
You create original e-mail items and replies in the New Message screen. All e-mail items must,
at the very least, contain information in the To: and Subj: fields.
To create an e-mail item:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Message, select New (/N).
3. Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.
Note:
Enter the address as if you were entering it from your desktop e-mail application. For
example, network users sending an e-mail item to a user on the same network do not
need to add Internet information, such as @mycorp.com.
4. To send a copy of this e-mail item to additional recipients, tap the CC: field, and then enter
the e-mail addresses of the additional recipients, separating the addresses with a comma
followed by a space.
5. In the Subj: field, enter a subject for your e-mail item.
6. In the Body: field, enter the text of your e-mail item.
Tip:
Page 176
If the address, CC, subject, or body exceeds the capacity of the screen display, tap
the name of the field (for example, tap “To:”) to expand that field. Hold Option
and
press Return
to return to the New Message screen.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Tap the name of the field to open
Tap to return to New Message screen
To reply to an e-mail item:
1. Open an e-mail item in the Message list to display it onscreen.
2. Tap Reply.
3. Select whom you want to receive the reply: Sender only, All recipients, or someone who didn’t
see the original e-mail item (Forward).
4. Select whether you want to include original text or comment original text.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
6. Enter the text of your reply.
Tip:
You have several options including setting the priority. See page 178 for details.
7. Tap Send to place your reply in the Outbox.
Looking up an address
To identify the recipient of an e-mail item, you need to enter that person’s e-mail address. You
can do this either by entering the data directly into the field or by using the Look Up command to
access the information in your Contacts list.
Chapter 8
Page 177
To look up an e-mail address:
1. Tap either the To: or CC: field name to expand it.
2. Enter the first few letters of the last name of the person whose address you want to find.
3. Press Menu
.
4. Under Options, select Lookup (/L).
5. If the letters you enter identify a unique listing from your Contacts list, your handheld
completes the address for you. If not, the Lookup dialog box appears and lists all records that
contain information in an E-mail field.
Tap
Lookup
6. Enter the first letter of the entry you want to find to scroll to the first entry that begins with
that letter. If you write an additional letter, the list scrolls to the first entry that starts with those
two letters. For example, writing an “s” scrolls to “Sanders,” and writing “sm” scrolls to “Smith.”
7. Tap an address to select it.
8. Tap Add.
Tap to select
Tap here to enter address in field
Adding details to e-mail items
Before you send your e-mail item, you can attach additional attributes to it, such as a signature
or a priority level. These features are dependent on the desktop E-mail application you use. If your
application does not support the attribute you select, your handheld cannot attach that attribute
to the e-mail item.
Page 178
Advanced HotSync® Operations
The following details are available:
Priority
Flags an e-mail item as High, Normal, or Low priority.
BCC
Creates a blind carbon copy field in the New Message screen.
Signature
Attaches previously defined text as the closing of an e-mail item. See page
180 for details.
Confirm Read Requests a confirmation telling you when the e-mail item was read.
Confirm
Delivery
Note:
Requests a confirmation telling you when the e-mail item was delivered.
The Priority and BCC settings are valid only for the current e-mail item and must be set
for each item you create.
Setting a priority
To set a priority for your e-mail item:
1. In the New Message screen, tap Details.
Tap here
2. Tap the Priority pick list and select the priority you want.
Tap here
Tap to select priority
3. Hold Option
Tip:
and press Return
to finish.
Your handheld can flag e-mail items with a specific priority only if your desktop e-mail
application supports this feature.
Chapter 8
Page 179
Sending a blind carbon copy
To add a BCC field to your e-mail item:
1. In the New Message screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the BCC check box to select it.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
BCC field
4. Tap the BCC: field and enter an address.
Adding a signature to your e-mail item
A signature consists of information about yourself that is appended to your e-mail item as its
closing. For example, a signature can contain your name, address, phone and fax numbers, and
any other text you want to include. By defining such information as a signature, you save yourself
the trouble of having to enter it every time you create an e-mail item.
Adding a signature to your message is a two-part process. First, you create your signature. Then
you select the Signature option.
To create a signature:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select Preferences (/R).
3. Tap the Signature text field and enter the text of your signature.
Add signature
text here
4. Hold Option
Page 180
and press Return
to finish.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
To add a signature to your e-mail item:
1. In the New Message screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Signature check box to select it and add your signature to the e-mail item.
Note:
The check box stays selected, so all subsequent e-mail items you create will also
contain your signature until you deselect the Signature option.
3. Hold Option
Note:
and press Return
to finish.
The signature does not display in your e-mail item; only your recipient sees the signature.
Requesting confirmations
To receive a confirmation when your e-mail item is read:
1. In the New Message screen, tap Details.
2. Tap the Confirm Read check box to select it.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To receive a confirmation when your e-mail item is delivered:
1. In the New Message screen, tap Details.
2. Select the Confirm Delivery check box to select it.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Storing e-mail to be sent later
When you send e-mail from your handheld, it actually stores the e-mail in the Outbox folder until
the next time you synchronize your handheld with your computer. During synchronization, all email stored in the Outbox folder is transferred to the Outbox folder in your desktop e-mail
application. E-mail created on your handheld is sent out the next time you send mail from your
desktop e-mail application.
To send e-mail:
■
After you create an e-mail item, tap Send.
Editing unsent e-mail
You can make changes to an e-mail that has not yet been sent, as long as you have not yet
performed a HotSync operation. When you edit an e-mail item, your handheld removes the item
from the Outbox folder and takes you back to the New Message screen, where you can edit the
item and resend it, save it as a draft, or delete it.
Chapter 8
Page 181
To retrieve an e-mail item:
1. In the Message list, tap Outbox from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
Tap here to display folder list
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the e-mail item you want to retrieve.
Tap here to
select item
Tap to
edit item
3. Tap Edit.
Draft e-mail
Sometimes you may not want to send an e-mail item immediately; for example, you may want to
add additional information before sending it. Your handheld stores such e-mail items in the Draft
folder until you are ready to edit them again.
Note:
When you’re creating or editing an e-mail item, you can also save the item as a draft by
canceling it. When you cancel an item, your handheld opens a dialog asking if you want
to save the e-mail item. If you tap Yes, your handheld saves the item in the Draft folder.
To save an e-mail item as a draft:
1. Create an e-mail item.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Message, select Save Draft (/W).
Page 182
Advanced HotSync® Operations
To edit an e-mail item saved as a draft:
1. In the Message list, tap Draft from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the draft you want to display.
Selected
item
Tap to
edit item
3. Tap Edit.
4. Enter your changes; then either save the e-mail item again as a draft, or tap Send to move
the item to your Outbox folder.
Filing e-mail
Your handheld can store e-mail you receive or create in the Filed folder. The contents of this
folder do not automatically synchronize with your desktop e-mail application during a HotSync
operation. Your handheld, however, stores a backup copy of the Filed folder on your computer
hard disk.
To file e-mail:
1. Open an e-mail item.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Message, select File (/I).
4. Tap No to save the e-mail item and move it to the Filed folder, or tap Yes to file the item and
keep a copy in the Inbox.
To remove e-mail from the Filed folder:
1. In the Message list, tap Filed from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the e-mail item you want to restore.
3. Tap Edit to display and modify the item.
Tip:
After you display and modify the e-mail item, you can send it, save it as a draft, or return
it to the Filed folder.
Chapter 8
Page 183
Deleting e-mail
Your handheld stores deleted e-mail in the Deleted folder until you perform the next HotSync
operation. If you delete an e-mail item from the handheld, it is also deleted from your desktop email application when you perform the next HotSync operation.
To delete e-mail:
1. Open the e-mail item you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
3. If you selected the Preferences option to confirm deletion, tap Yes.
Removing e-mail from the Deleted folder
You can reverse the deletion of an e-mail item (by removing it from the Deleted folder) as long
as you have not performed a HotSync operation or purged the contents of the Deleted folder.
To remove an e-mail item you received from the Deleted folder:
1. In the Message list, tap Deleted from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the e-mail item you want to restore.
3. Tap Undelete to move the selected item to the Inbox and mark it as read.
To remove an e-mail item you created from the Deleted folder:
1. In the Message list, tap Deleted from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the e-mail item you want to restore.
3. Tap Edit to display and modify the item.
Note:
After you display and modify the e-mail item, you can send it or save it as a draft.
Purging deleted e-mail
Because your handheld stores deleted e-mail in the Deleted folder until you perform a HotSync
operation, deleted e-mail can monopolize storage space. To avoid or correct this problem, purge
the contents of your Deleted folder. E-mail that you purge is still deleted from your desktop e-mail
application when you perform the next HotSync operation.
To purge the contents of the Deleted folder:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Message, select Purge Deleted (/E).
3. Tap Yes.
Note:
You cannot restore e-mail items after you purge them.
Page 184
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Message list options
Message list options enable you to manage the way the Message list displays information.
Folders
Your handheld provides folders for categorizing your mail. The Message list displays the e-mail
items in the folder you select.
To select a folder:
1. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner to open the list of folders:
Inbox
Contains the e-mail from your desktop e-mail application Inbox, minus any that you
have excluded using filtering options. See page 187 for details.
Outbox
Contains the e-mail you created and sent on the handheld since the last HotSync
operation.
Deleted
Contains the e-mail you deleted since the last HotSync operation.
Filed
Contains the e-mail you want to store on the handheld.
Draft
Contains the e-mail you created using the handheld but are not yet ready to send.
2. Select the folder you want to display in the Message list screen.
Date column
The Date column is optional in the Message list. By default, the Date column is hidden to increase
the available screen space.
To show the Date column:
1. In the Message list, tap Show.
Tap Show
2. Tap the Show Date check box to select it.
3. Hold Option
Chapter 8
and press Return
to finish.
Page 185
Sorting the Message list
You can sort e-mail items by the date sent, by sender, or by subject.
Note:
High-priority e-mail items always appear first, no matter how you sort the list.
To sort the Message list:
1. In the Message list, tap Show.
2. Tap the Sort by pick list and select one of the following options:
Date
Sorts e-mail by date and displays the most recent e-mail item at the top of the
screen.
Sender
Sorts e-mail by the sender’s user name and displays items in ascending
alphabetical order, based on the first word of the From: field.
Subject
Sorts e-mail by the subject and displays items in ascending alphabetical order,
based on the first word of the Subj: field.
3. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Palm Mail HotSync options
Palm Mail’s HotSync options enable you to manage your e-mail more effectively by selecting
which e-mail items download when you synchronize your computer and your handheld. You can
define different settings for local and remote synchronization. For example, you may want to
download all of your e-mail during local synchronization and only urgent e-mail during remote
synchronization. Once defined, your handheld determines if synchronization is occurring locally or
remotely and uses the appropriate settings for the HotSync operation.
Note:
The default setting is All. So, if your e-mail Inbox has lots of messages, synchronization
could be time consuming.
To open the HotSync Options dialog box:
1. Press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select HotSync Options (/H).
3. Tap the Settings for pick list and select Local HotSync or Remote HotSync.
Tap here
to display
HotSync
options
Page 186
Advanced HotSync® Operations
4. Tap the filtering option you want to apply:
All
During synchronization, all e-mail items in your desktop e-mail Inbox
synchronize with your handheld, and all e-mail items in your handheld Outbox
are sent to your desktop E-Mail application.
Send Only
During synchronization, only the e-mail items in your handheld Outbox are
sent to your desktop e-mail application; from there, they are sent to their
destinations.
Filter
During synchronization, all e-mail items in your handheld Outbox are sent to
your desktop E-Mail application, and items in your desktop E-Mail Inbox that
meet specific criteria download to your handheld. When you select the Filter
setting, the HotSync Options dialog box opens and displays additional filter
settings. See page 187 for details.
Unread
During synchronization, only unread e-mail items download to your handheld
from your desktop e-mail Inbox, and all items in your handheld Outbox are
sent to your desktop e-mail application.
Note:
The All setting does not mean that all information included in each e-mail item
downloads to your handheld. Truncation settings (explained in a following section) for
long e-mail items still apply. Also, Palm Mail never downloads any attachments to your
handheld. The e-mail item and any text information appear, but the attachment is left
in your desktop e-mail application.
5. If you selected All, Send only, or Unread, Hold Option
selected Filter, continue to the next section.
and press Return
to finish. If you
Creating special filters
You can create special filters to control the type of e-mail items that download to your handheld
during synchronization. Special filters work on the premise of ignoring or retrieving items that
contain specific information in their header fields.
To create a special filter, you must decide whether you want to ignore or retrieve certain e-mail
items. Then, based on that decision, you must tell your handheld what it needs to look for in the
To:, From:, and Subj: fields to single out those e-mail items.
To access the special filter settings:
■
Tap the Filter box in the HotSync Options dialog box.
Tap here to
display Filter
options
Chapter 8
Page 187
Ignoring or receiving e-mail
The first step in establishing a special filter is to determine whether you want to ignore or retrieve
e-mail that matches the information you specify.
To define whether to ignore or receive e-mail:
■
Tap the pick list in the center of the HotSync Options dialog box and select one of the
following settings:
Tap here
Select Filter option
Ignore
Messages
Containing
Tells your handheld to exclude the e-mail items that meet the criteria you
define and download all other e-mail items during synchronization. In general,
this filter downloads more e-mail during synchronization because it blocks only
one defined subset of e-mail.
Retrieve
Only Msgs
Containing
Tells your handheld to include only the e-mail items that meet the criteria you
define and to ignore all other e-mail items during synchronization. This filter
has the potential to block more e-mail during synchronization because it
downloads only one subset of e-mail.
Defining filter strings
E-mail items are filtered based on the information contained in their To:, From:, and Subj: fields.
The information that defines what your handheld is looking for is called a filter string. You create
a filter string by listing the words you want your handheld to find and separating them with either
a comma or a space. Each word in the filter string is joined by an implicit OR, so you do not need
to enter logical connectors like AND or OR.
To create a more complex filter, you can define filter strings for the To:, From:, and Subj: fields
simultaneously. Your handheld joins the filter strings for these fields using an implicit AND; once
again, you do not need to add the logical connector. Your handheld does that for you.
For example, suppose you want to receive only e-mail items from John Smith ([email protected])
or Jack Jones ([email protected]) concerning the Apollo Project. You would create the following
filter strings:
In the To: field: [email protected], [email protected]
In the Subj: field: Apollo Project
Page 188
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Your handheld interprets this as, “Accept e-mail items about the Apollo Project from John Smith
or Jack Jones. Do not accept e-mail items from other people. Do not accept e-mail items from
John or Jack about any other subject.”
When you define a string, note that your handheld searches for any instance of that sequence of
characters. For example, if you create a filter that retrieves only e-mail items containing the string
“info,” your handheld considers “info,” “rainforest” and “kinfolk” appropriate matches.
To define a filter string:
1. Tap a header field in the HotSync Options dialog box.
Tap here to
insert cursor
2. Enter your filter string, using commas or spaces to separate the words. Do not add
connectors, such as AND or OR, between words in a string.
3. If your string exceeds the length of the field, tap the name of the field to display the Notes
screen for that header field. For more information about header field Notes screens, see page
176 for details.
Enter filter data
Tap here
4. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to finish.
High-priority e-mail
The Retrieve All High Priority setting lets you retrieve e-mail items marked high-priority, even if
those items would have been blocked by a defined filter.
Chapter 8
Page 189
To retrieve high-priority e-mail items:
1. Tap the Filter box in the HotSync Options dialog box.
2. Tap the Retrieve All High Priority check box to select it.
Tap
check
box
3. Hold Option
Note:
and press Return
to finish.
This setting is applicable only if your e-mail application has the capacity to flag highpriority e-mail items.
Truncating e-mail items
The Truncate feature lets you set a point at which long e-mail items truncate when downloading
to your handheld. By default, this Truncate value is 4,000 characters. By truncating long
messages, you reduce the time it takes to synchronize your desktop e-mail and Palm Mail, as well
as the amount of storage space e-mail uses on your handheld.
Note:
Truncation is separate and independent from filtering.
To truncate e-mail items:
1. Tap Truncate in the HotSync Options dialog box.
Tap to
select
maximum
length
Tap
Truncate
2. Tap to select the truncation setting you want.
Tip:
If you select the maximum setting, messages can be 8,000 characters; longer
messages are truncated. If you select a lower value, you’ll have more room for e-mail
items.
3. Hold Option
Page 190
and press Return
to finish.
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Palm Mail menus
Palm Mail menus are shown here for your reference, and Palm Mail features that are not
explained elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 29 for information about choosing menu commands.
Message menus
The Message menu varies depending on whether you are viewing an e-mail item, creating an email item, or viewing the Message list.
Message list
New Message
View Message
Options menus
The Options menu varies depending on whether you are creating or editing an e-mail item.
Message list
About Mail
Chapter 8
New Message
Shows version information for Palm Mail.
Page 191
Page 192
Advanced HotSync® Operations
Chapter 9
Using the Wireless Application Suite
This chapter provides information on how to use the applications and features that are specific
to wireless data communication. The Wireless Application Suite includes the Blazer web browser,
Palm SMS text messaging, and One-Touch Mail™ by JP Mobile e-mail application.
To use the Wireless Application Suite, you must have the following:
■
A data-enabled mobile phone that is equipped with an IR port or a special cable that enables
you to connects your mobile phone to your handheld.
■
A wireless service provider that supports data services and it must be part of your service
package (some wireless service providers may require you to sign up for data services
separately).
■
An account established with an ISP (Internet Service Provider). Many wireless service
providers also provide ISP services. If ISP information is available from your wireless service
provider when you configure your wireless communication settings with the Handspring CDROM, the installation program sets up your handheld for use with that provider.
To install the Wireless Application Suite:
1. Insert the Handspring CD into the CD-ROM drive on your computer.
2. Complete step 1 of the installation process to install the synchronization software.
3. Proceed to step 2 of the installation process to install the Wireless Application Suite.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the components you want to use.
Chapter 9
Page 193
Preparing for mobile communications
After you install the Wireless Applications Suite software, you’re ready to connect your handheld
to your mobile phone and use it for mobile communication. You can connect your handheld and
your mobile phone using infrared communication, or using a special cable.
To connect your handheld to your mobile phone with infrared communication:
1. Make sure infrared communication is enabled on your mobile phone.
2. Align the IR port on your handheld with the IR port on your mobile phone.
To connect your handheld to your mobile phone with a special cable:
1. Connect one end of the cable to your mobile phone.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the connector on the bottom of your handheld.
Page 194
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Blazer Web Browser
If you can’t hold the world in the palm of your hand, at least you can hold the World Wide Web
when you use Blazer to browse the Internet on your handheld’s screen.
In Blazer, you can do the following:
■
Access the World Wide Web and display Internet content.
■
Create up to 100 bookmarks for quick and convenient access to your favorite web sites.
■
Navigate between web pages with familiar toolbar icons.
To use Blazer, you must subscribe to data services from your wireless service provider, and you
must have an account established with an ISP (Internet Service Provider). Many wireless service
providers also provide ISP services. If ISP information is available from your wireless service
provider when you configure your wireless communication settings with the Handspring CDROM, the installation program will set up Blazer for use with that provider.
Note:
If you already installed the desktop software from the Handspring CD-ROM but didn’t
configure the wireless communication settings, select Configure Wireless Suite under
Handspring (or Palm) on the Windows Start menu, and follow the instructions on the
screen.
Viewing web pages
You can view web pages whenever you connect to your mobile phone via the IR port or a special
cable. If you are outside a coverage area, you can view web pages that are stored temporarily on
your handheld in an area called the “cache.” However, if a page stored in the cache has an
expiration date and it is past that date, you need to establish an Internet connection to view that
page.
To view a web page:
1. Prepare your handheld and mobile phone for data communications. See page 194 for details.
2. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
3. Use the scroll buttons to select the Blazer icon
4. Press Return
5. Press Menu
.
to launch the application.
.
6. Under Go, select Go to Web Page (/G).
Tip:
Chapter 9
You can also tap the Folder icon
to open the Go to Web Page dialog box.
Page 195
Folder icon
7. Enter the URL you want to view.
8. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
9. Tap Yes to connect now.
While a page is loading, a Progress icon
appears in the lower right corner of the screen.
You can tap links to other pages as soon as they appear. You don’t need to wait until a page
fully loads. To stop loading a page, tap the Stop icon
in the lower left corner of the screen.
Tap to go to
home page
10. To scroll through a page, do any of the following:
■
Press the scroll buttons on the front panel of your handheld.
■
Tap the onscreen arrows or scroll bar (if one appears).
Tip:
To view a list of web sites that are optimized for your handheld, go to the home page,
and then tap Directory of Mobile Sites.
Working with bookmarks
The Bookmark view makes it easy for you to get to web sites you visit often.
Viewing bookmarked pages
Your handheld may come with a few bookmarks already in place. You can jump directly to any of
the predefined bookmarks, or to any pages for which you’ve created a bookmark.
Page 196
Using the Wireless Application Suite
To view a bookmark:
1. Prepare your handheld and mobile phone for data communications. See page 194 for details.
2. From the Page view, tap the Bookmark view icon
.
3. Tap the bookmark you want to view.
Tap to view
more pages
Tip:
You can also press the scroll buttons to scroll to other pages.
Adding bookmarks
You can store up to 100 bookmarks and group them in categories by placing similar links on the
same bookmark page. See page 199 for information on creating page categories.
To bookmark the current page:
1. From the Page view, go to the page you want to bookmark.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Page, select Add Bookmark (/A).
4. Hold Option
Tip:
and press Return
to finish.
You can also add a bookmark by tapping an empty bookmark slot in the Bookmark view
and entering a Name, Description, and URL for the page you want to bookmark.
Chapter 9
Page 197
To define a bookmark:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Add Bookmark (/A).
Tip:
You can also open the New Bookmark dialog box by tapping an empty bookmark slot.
3. Enter a Name, Description, and URL for the page you want to bookmark.
Tap an
empty
slot
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Editing bookmarks
You can change the title, description, or URL associated with any of your bookmarks.
To edit a bookmark:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E).
Tap a bookmark
Page icons
3. Tap the page icons to navigate to the page containing the bookmark you want to change.
Tip:
You can enter or change the Title for any bookmark page. Use the page Title to
create bookmark categories. For example, if you want to create a page with links to
various investments, you might name the page Assets.
4. Tap the bookmark you want to change.
5. Enter the changes.
6. Hold Option
Page 198
and press Return
to finish.
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Deleting bookmarks
If your bookmark list becomes full, or you no longer need an entry, you can delete it.
To delete a bookmark:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E).
3. Tap the entry you want to delete.
4. In the Edit Bookmark dialog, tap Delete.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
twice to confirm deletion.
Arranging your bookmarks
As your bookmark list grows, you may want to rearrange the entries or move entire pages. You
can assign a title to each bookmark page and arrange the entries by category. For example, if you
want to create a page with links to various sports scores, you might name the page Scores.
To assign page category titles:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E).
3. Tap the page icon to which you want to assign a title.
4. Enter the title.
5. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To rearrange bookmark entries:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E).
3. Drag the entries to the slot where you want them to appear.
Drag an entry to
another slot or
page
Tip:
If the new slot is full, the other entries move down one slot as the rows fill from top
to bottom. If you drag an entry to a page icon, the entry moves to the first available
slot on that page.
4. Hold Option
Chapter 9
and press Return
to finish.
Page 199
To rearrange bookmark pages:
1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu
.
2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E).
3. Drag the page to the slot where you want it to appear.
A grey line appears next to the page when it is in drag mode. When dropping a page on the
top row, the grey line appears to the left of the slot where the page will appear. When dropping a page on the bottom row, the grey line appears to the right of the slot where the page
will appear.
Drag a page to
another slot
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
Blazer menus
Blazer menus are shown here for your reference, and Blazer features that are not explained
elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 33 for information about choosing menu commands.
The Go and Options menus differ depending on whether you’re displaying the Page view or the
Bookmark view.
Page menu
Page view
Refresh
Enables you to update the current web page with the most up-to-date
information.
Stop loading
Cancels the process of loading a page.
Page 200
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Properties
Displays the Page Properties dialog box where you can view the Page Name,
URL, Size (Bytes) and whether the page was loaded from the cache.
Bookmarks menu
Bookmark view
Go menus
Bookmark view
Page view
Options menu
Bookmark view
Chapter 9
Page view
Page 201
Preferences
Browser tab:
Home page. Displays the URL of the current home page selection. Tap this
option to open the Set Home Page dialog box and select a different home
page. To restore the factory default Home Page setting, tap Restore in the
Set Home Page dialog box.
■
Note:
Page 202
Some service providers may not support the default Home Page
setting.
■
Initial view. Determines whether the Page view or Bookmark view appears
when you start the Blazer application. The default option is Page view.
■
Images. Determines how many shades of gray are used to display graphic
images. You can also choose to not display images at all. The options are:
No Images (fastest), Black & White (faster), 4 Shades of Gray (fast), and
16 shades of Gray (slow). The default setting is 16 shades of Gray (slow).
■
Ask before establishing Internet connection. Displays a confirmation
dialog each time you begin an Internet session. The default setting for this
option is on.
■
Disconnect On Exit. Determines whether the Internet connection
automatically closes when you exit the Blazer application. Leaving this
option off enables you to switch to another application and then return to
Blazer while you are still connected to the Internet. The default setting for
this option is off.
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Preferences
(continued)
Advanced tab:
■
Cache Size (K). Displays the amount of memory that Blazer reserves to
store recently viewed pages. The amount of free memory available on your
handheld appears below this option.
■
Clear. Erases all the pages stored in the cache. You cannot cancel or undo
this action.
■
Accept Cookies. Enables the receipt of Internet cookies. The default setting
for this option is on.
■
Clear Cookies. Erases all the cookies stored on your handheld. You cannot
cancel or undo this action.
■
Set Proxy. Opens the Set Proxy dialog box where you can enter advanced
HTTP proxy server settings. If your ISP or network requires you to go
through a proxy server when you connect to the Internet, use this dialog box
to enter the proxy server settings. Contact your ISP or system administrator
for details.
Disconnect
Terminates your connection to the Internet.
About Blazer
Displays version information for Blazer.
Chapter 9
Page 203
Palm™ SMS
Palm™ SMS provides a way for you to use your Treo and a GSM mobile phone to exchange short
text messages with other people who also use GSM mobile phones and subscribe to an SMS
service. These text messages, also called SMS (Short Message Service) messages, are similar to
e-mail messages that you send and receive from your computer, but are limited to 160 characters
in length. In addition to sending text, you can use Palm SMS to send and receive records from
your handheld applications as an SMS message. Sending a record is similar to sending
attachments with an e-mail message, but in the case of SMS, the data becomes the message, it
isn’t something extra you send with a text message.
In Palm SMS, you can do the following:
■
Send and receive short text messages.
■
Read incoming messages directly from the Inbox.
■
Review messages you sent in the Sent folder.
■
Send data from other applications including Contacts, Date Book Plus, Memo Pad, and
To Do List
Note:
The person receiving your SMS message must also have a GSM mobile phone and a
wireless service provider that supports text messages. Some wireless service providers
may use a different name for their text messaging service. Contact your GSM wireless
service provider to see if their service is compatible with SMS.
To open Palm SMS:
1. Press Option
and then press Menu
to access the Applications Launcher.
2. Use the scroll buttons to select the Palm SMS icon
3. Press Return
.
to launch the application.
The SMS screen opens where you can access any of the following categories:
Inbox
Stores incoming messages that you downloaded from your phone.
Outbox
Stores messages waiting to be sent.
Trash
Stores message which you’ve deleted. Deleted messages can be restored to
their original category until your empty the trash.
Archive
Stores messages you’ve read and want to keep.
Page 204
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Draft
Stores messages you’ve created but are not ready to send. You can read or
edit draft messages before sending them.
Receiving SMS messages
When you receive SMS messages, they appear in the Inbox category. The icons to the right and
left of the description indicate the item status and whether the message contains a data record.
Note:
You can receive SMS messages even if you don’t subscribe to your wireless service
provider’s SMS service.
To receive and view text messages:
1. Connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page 194 for details.
2. From any SMS list view, press Menu
.
3. Under Message, select Check (/H).
Tip:
You can also check for incoming messages and send any messages in your outbox
simultaneously by tapping Send & Check.
Number of new messages
Dot indicates
unread message
Puzzle indicates
incomplete
4. Use the scroll buttons to select the message you want to view.
5. Press Space
to open the message.
6. Tap one of the following buttons:
Done
Saves the message in the Inbox category and marks the message as read.
Reply
Opens the new message dialog box, and addresses the message to the
person who sent you the message.
Delete
Moves the current message to the Trash category.
Chapter 9
Page 205
To receive and view data messages:
1. Connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page 194 for details.
2. From any SMS list view, press Menu
.
3. Under Message, select Check (/H).
Tip:
You can also check for incoming messages and send any messages in your outbox
simultaneously by tapping Send & Check.
Paperclip icon
4. Use the scroll buttons to select a message that has a paperclip icon in the right column.
5. Press Space
to open the message.
6. In the Transfer dialog box, tap Yes to insert the record in the corresponding application, or tap
No to view the record as text.
Note:
When you view a data record as text, some characters may appear differently than in
their native application.
Creating text messages
Palm SMS enables you to create short text messages and send them to a GSM mobile phone
number. If a message exceeds 160 characters, Palm SMS automatically divides the text into
multiple messages when it sends the message. As you create a message, the status bar at the
top of the screen indicates how many characters are in the current message.
To create an SMS text message:
1. From any SMS list view, tap New.
2. Tap To.
3. Use the scroll buttons to select a name with a mobile phone number from your Contacts list,
or enter a mobile phone number.
Note:
Page 206
Contact entries with mobile phone numbers appear with an (M) next to them in the
Contacts list. Contact entries without a mobile phone number do not appear in the
Lookup dialog box.
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Tap To
4. Enter the message text.
5. Connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page 194 for details.
6. Tap one of the following buttons
Send
Sends the current message. If an error occurs, a message dialog box asks
you if you want to save this message to the Outbox. To use this command,
you must first connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page
194 for details.
Outbox
Puts the current message into the Outbox so that you can send it later by
using the Send menu command, or the Send & Check button. A dialog box
informs you about this operation, and you can choose to not display the
alert again.
Cancel
Asks if you want to put the message into the Draft folder so you can view
or edit it before sending it. Tap Yes to store the message in the Draft folder,
tap No to delete the message.
When a message transmits sucessfully, a check appears next to it in the Outbox folder.
Creating a message signature
You can create a signature of up to 80 characters. Then, when you create a message, you can
insert your signature at the end of your messages.
To create a message signature:
1. From any SMS list view, press Menu
.
2. Under Options, select Preferences (/R).
Enter the
signature text
Chapter 9
Page 207
3. Enter the signature text.
4. Hold Option
and press Return
to finish.
To add your signature to a message:
1. Create or open the message to which you want to add the signature.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Options, select Add Signature (/Z).
Sending data via SMS
You can also use Palm SMS to send and receive records from your handheld applications as an
SMS message. Sending a record is similar to sending attachments with an e-mail message, but
in the case of SMS, the data becomes the message, it isn’t something extra you send with a text
message.
If the recipient is using a Palm OS handheld, the recipient can insert the information directly in
the native application, otherwise the information appears as text.
To send data via an SMS message:
1. Open the record you want to send.
2. Press Menu
.
3. Under Record, select Send (/S).
4. Tap Lookup to select a name from your Contacts list
Tip:
You can also enter a mobile phone number, or tap To to select a recently used name.
5. Connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page 194 for details.
6. Tap Send.
Modifying messages
You can modify any messages in the Draft category.
To store a message in the Draft category:
1. Create the message.
2. Do one of the following:
■
Press Menu
■
Tap Cancel, and then tap Yes.
Page 208
, and under Message, select Draft (/D).
Using the Wireless Application Suite
To modify Draft messages:
1. In the Draft category, open the message you want to change.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Edit the message.
4. Tap one of the following buttons:
Send
Sends the message. If an error occurs, a message dialog box asks you if
you want to save this message to the Outbox. To use this command, you
must first connect your handheld to your GSM mobile phone. See page
194 for details.
Outbox
Puts the current message into the Outbox so that you can send it later.
Cancel
Asks if you want to put the message into the Draft folder. Tap Yes to return
the message to the Draft folder, tap No to delete the message.
SMS Messaging menus
SMS Messaging menus are shown here for your reference, and SMS Messaging features that
are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here.
See page 33 for information about choosing menu commands.
Message menus
Message view
List view
Archive
Places the selected message in the Archive category.
Send
Sends all message in the Outbox category.
Empty Trash
Delete all message in the Trash category. This permanently removes the
messages from your handheld.
Options menus
List views
Message views
Phone Lookup
Chapter 9
Opens the Phone Lookup dialog box where you can select the recipient’s
mobile phone number.
Page 209
Preferences
Sort by. Enables you to sort messages by Date, Type, Sender, or Content
Show Date. Toggles the display of the date on and off.
Alert Sound. Activates an alarm ring when you receive a new SMS
message. Select the sound you want to play from the pick list.
Confirm Deleted Message. Displays a confirmation dialog box each time
you delete a message.
Delete After Transfer. Deletes SMS messages with attachments after
transferring the data to the corresponding application.
Signature. Enables you to define a signature that you can add to the end of
a message while creating or editing it.
Details. Opens the Details dialog box where you can select the following
options:
■
Leave Messages on Phone. Enables you to choose if messages are
automatically deleted from your phone after transferring them to
your handheld. Clear this check box to keep messages on your
phone after you transfer them to your handheld.
■
Return Receipt. Enables you to choose whether to receive a notice
confirming receipt of a message.
■
Warn Over. Activates a warning when a multi-part message exceeds
more than the selected number of parts.
About SMS
Page 210
■
Expires. Enables you to indicate how long unsent messages remain
in your Outbox.
■
Message Center. Enables you to enter the number for your wireless
service provider’s SMS message center, or to read the number directly
from the phone.
Shows version information for Palm SMS.
Using the Wireless Application Suite
One-Touch Mail
One-Touch Mail is a wireless e-mail application that enables you to access your ISP (POP3
account) e-mail directly from your handheld by using your data-enabled mobile phone to access
the Internet. You may also be able to use One-Touch Mail to access your corporate e-mail;
contact your System Administrator for assistance.
To install One-Touch Mail, do one of the following:
■
Select the One-Touch Mail option when you configure the wireless communication features
using the Handspring CD-ROM.
■
If you already installed the desktop software from the Handspring CD-ROM but didn’t install
this application, select Configure Wireless Suite under Programs/Handspring (or Palm) on
the Windows Start menu, and then select One Touch Mail when prompted to select an
application to install.
For instructions on how to use One-Touch Mail, refer to the One-Touch Mail .PDF file located
inside the Handspring\Wireless Suite\One-Touch Mail folder on your computer.
Chapter 9
Page 211
Page 212
Using the Wireless Application Suite
Appendix A
Maintaining Your Handheld
This chapter provides information on the following:
■
Proper care of your Treo™ 90 handheld
■
Maximizing battery life
■
Resetting your handheld
Caring for your handheld
Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of trouble-free service.
Please observe the following general tips when using your handheld:
■
Take care not to scratch the screen of your handheld. Keep the screen clean. When working
with your handheld, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a
touch-sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface
of the handheld screen.
■
Your handheld is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or moisture. Under
extreme conditions, water may enter the circuitry through the front panel buttons. In general,
treat your handheld as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument.
■
The touch-sensitive screen of your handheld contains a glass element. Take care not to drop
your handheld or subject it to any strong impact. Do not carry your handheld in your back
pocket: if you sit on it, the glass may break.
■
Protect your handheld from temperature extremes. Do not leave your handheld on the
dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heaters and other heat sources.
■
Do not store or use your handheld in any location that is extremely dusty, damp, or wet.
■
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean your handheld. If the surface of the handheld screen becomes
soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution.
Battery considerations
Please note the following considerations when using the rechargeable battery in your handheld:
■
Your handheld battery provides approximately 10 days of use between charges.
■
You can conserve battery life by reducing the brightness of the backlight feature and by
choosing a lower Auto-off setting which automatically turns the handheld off after a period
of inactivity. See page 141 and page 16 for more information.
■
If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert appears on the handheld
screen describing the low battery condition. If this alert appears, connect your handheld to the
HotSync cable or travel charger to charge the battery.
Appendix A
Page 213
■
If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not turn on, it stores your data
safely for about three days. In this case, there is enough residual energy in the battery to store
the data, but not enough to turn on your handheld. If your handheld does not turn on when
you press the power button, you should charge the battery immediately.
■
If you leave a drained battery in your handheld for an extended period of time, you can lose
all of the stored data. If this happens, charge the battery and then perform a HotSync
operation to restore the data from your computer.
Resetting your handheld
Under normal circumstances, you will not have to use the reset button. On rare occasions,
however, your handheld may no longer respond to buttons or the screen. In this case, you need
to perform a reset to get your handheld running again.
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it’s doing and start over again. All records and entries
stored in your handheld are retained with a soft reset. After a soft reset, the Palm Powered™
screen appears, followed by the Date & Time Preferences screen.
To perform a soft reset:
1. Unscrew the tip of the stylus to access the reset tool.
Reset tool
2. Use the reset tool to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your
handheld.
Tip:
Page 214
You can also use the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip).
Maintaining Your Handheld
Performing a warm (or safe) reset
A warm (or safe) reset bypasses system extensions on your handheld, such as HackMaster hacks
or system patches. Performing a warm reset enables you to uninstall a third-party application that
may be causing a problem.
To perform a warm (or safe) reset:
1. Press and hold the top scroll button on the front panel of your handheld.
2. While holding down the top scroll button, use the reset tool (or similar object without a sharp
tip) to gently press the reset button.
3. When the system screen appears, release the top scroll button.
Performing a hard reset
With a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased. Never perform a
hard reset unless a soft or warm reset does not solve your problem.
Note:
You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during the next
HotSync operation.
To perform a hard reset:
1. Press and hold the power button on the top of the handheld.
2. While holding down the power button, use the reset tool (or similar object without a sharp tip)
to gently press and release the reset button.
3. When the system screen appears, release the power button.
4. When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to erase all the
data stored on your handheld, do one of the following:
■
Press the top scroll button on the front panel of your handheld to complete the hard reset
and display the Digitizer screen.
■
Press any other button to perform a soft reset.
Note:
With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats Preferences and
other settings are restored to their factory default settings.
5. If the language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected for your
desktop software. Choosing a different language may result in loss of data.
Appendix A
Page 215
To restore your data after a hard reset:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon
taskbar).
Tip:
 in the Windows system tray (bottom-right corner of the
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu bar.
2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom.
3. Select the appropriate user name from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
5. Click Change.
6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld.
Note:
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9. Click Done to activate your settings.
10. Perform a HotSync operation.
Page 216
Maintaining Your Handheld
Appendix B
Troubleshooting Tips
If you encounter a problem with your Treo™ 90 handheld:
■
Review this section to see if your problem is listed
■
Check our web site at www.handspring.com for the latest technical support information
Note:
Thousands of add-on applications have been written for Palm OS® devices.
Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large number of non-Handspring
software applications. If you are having a problem with a non-Handspring application,
please contact the developer or publisher of that software.
Software installation problems
Problem
Solution
Palm™ Desktop software will
not install successfully.
Disable any anti-virus software, close any open applications or
utilities, and then perform the installation again.
If you are installing on a computer at your workplace, make
sure your System Administrator grants you the rights to install
software.
If you are still having problems installing the Handspring
software, try these steps:
1. Download the latest version of the software from the
Customer Support or Product Support section of
www.handspring.com.
2. Restart your computer in “safe mode.” In most versions of
Windows you can do this by pressing F8 on the keyboard
as the computer boots.
3. Install the file you downloaded in step 1. If the installation
finishes, restart your computer in the normal operating
mode and start using Palm Desktop software.
Appendix B
Page 217
Operating problems
Problem
Solution
My handheld won’t
turn on.
Try each of these in turn:
■
Adjust the contrast settings.
■
Make sure the battery is fully charged.
■
Perform a soft reset. See page 214 for details.
■
If your handheld still does not operate, try a hard reset. See
page 215 for details.
My handheld keeps turning
itself off.
Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of
inactivity. This period can be set at one, two, or three minutes.
Check the Auto-off setting. See page 141 for details.
My handheld has frozen.
This is most commonly attributed to conflicts with nonHandspring software. Try each of these in turn:
I don’t see anything on my
handheld’s screen.
■
Perform a soft reset. See page 214 for details.
■
Delete any application you recently installed. See page 42
for details.
■
Perform a warm reset. See page 215 for details.
■
Perform a hard reset. See page 215 for details.
■
Adjust the contrast settings.
■
Charge the battery.
■
Perform a soft reset.
Tapping and keyboard problems
Problem
Solution
When I tap the buttons or
screen icons, it activates the
wrong feature.
Calibrate the screen. See page 140 for details.
When I press Menu
nothing happens.
Not all applications or screens have menus. Try changing to a
different application.
Page 218
,
Troubleshooting Tips
Wireless communication problems
Problem
Solution
The Blazer® application won’t
connect to the Internet
■
Confirm that you wireless service plan includes data
services and not just voice minutes.
■
If you’re using an infrared connection, make sure the
infrared port on your mobile phone is enabled. If you’re
using a cable connection, make sure the cable is securely
attached to your mobile phone.
■
Check with your Internet Service Provider to confirm that
your Network Preferences settings are properly configured.
1.Press Option
and then press Menu
Applications Launcher.
to access the
2.Use the scroll buttons to select the Preferences icon
3.Press Return
.
to launch the application.
4.Select Network from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
5.Check your Username, Password, and the phone number.
The phone number should be the number you use to dialin to your ISP.
6.Tap Connect. If the Connect button changes to a
Disconnect button after the connection dialogs finish,
your Network Preferences settings are working. If the
Connect button does not change, tap Details and enter
DNS and IP address information for your Internet Service
Provider.
Important:
Appendix B
AOL users must download AOL for Palm from
www.aol.com/anywhere/pda/palm/palmaol to
retrieve e-mail. AOL does not support web
browsing with Blazer.
Page 219
The Palm SMS application
doesn’t work
■
Make sure you have a GSM mobile phone.
■
Make sure you installed the proper Palm OS phone driver:
1.Press Option
and then press Menu
Applications Launcher.
to access the
2.Use the scroll buttons to select the Preferences icon
3.Press Return
.
to launch the application.
4.Select Phone from the pick list in the upper-right corner.
5.Confirm that the model listed under Connection matches
your GSM phone and the connection method you plan to
use (infrared or cable).
6.Tap Test.
Some phone numbers don’t
appear in the SMS Lookup
Make sure the number you want is identified as a mobile
number in your Contacts list. Only mobile phone numbers
appear when you use the SMS Lookup feature.
I can’t send SMS messages
■
Check the SMS Preferences dialog under Options in the
SMS application and confirm that the SMS Message Center
number on this screen is correct.
■
Check with your wireless service provider to confirm that
your wireless service plan includes SMS.
Note: Receiving SMS messages does not indicate that
you have a subscription to your wireless service
provider’s SMS service. You must subscribe to this
service to send or reply to messages.
Page 220
■
Verify that you are in a GSM coverage area.
■
Make sure the destination number is correct. Some wireless
service providers require 11-digit phone numbers for SMS
messages.
Troubleshooting Tips
Application problems
Problem
Solution
I tapped the Today button,
but it does not show the
correct date.
Your handheld is not set to the current date. Make sure the
Set Date box in the Date & Time Preferences screen displays
the current date. See page 22 and page 141 for details.
I know I entered some
records, but they do not
appear in the application.
■
Check the Categories pick list (upper-right corner of the
screen). Choose All to display all of the records for the
application.
■
Check Security and make sure that the Private Records
setting is set to Show private records.
■
In To Do List, tap Show and check whether Show Only
Due Items is selected.
■
If you cannot manually arrange the order of the memos in
the list screen, check the Memo Preferences setting.
Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
■
If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm
Desktop software and then perform a HotSync ®
operation, the memos on your handheld still appear in the
order defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In other
words, the sort settings that you use with Palm Desktop
software are not transferred to your handheld.
I am having problems listing
memos the way I want to see
them.
I created an event in Date
Book Plus, but it doesn’t
appear in the Week View.
Appendix B
In the Week View, you cannot select overlapping events that
have the same start time. If you have two or more events with
the same start time, choose the Day View for the particular
day to see the overlapping events.
Page 221
HotSync problems
Problem
Solution
Why can’t I synchronize
my handheld with my
computer?
Try each of these in turn. After each step, try to synchronize to see
if the problem persists:
■
Make sure you installed the software that came with your
handheld. You must install this software even if you upgraded
from another Palm OS handheld.
■
Make sure you selected your user name in Palm Desktop
software before beginning the HotSync operation.
■
Perform a soft reset. See page 214 for details.
■
I did a HotSync
operation, but one of my
applications did not
synchronize.
Page 222
 appears in the
Make sure the HotSync Manager icon
Windows system tray in the lower-right corner of the screen. If
it does not appear, open the Start menu, select Programs,
Handspring, and then HotSync Manager.
■
Click the HotSync Manager icon and make sure that the Local
USB option has a check next to it. If you are using an optional
serial cable, make sure that the Local Serial has a check next
to it, then select Setup and confirm that the COM port setting
matches the port where you attached the serial cable.
■
Make sure the cable is connected securely to your computer
and your handheld.
■
Make sure you are using the correct type of cable. If your
computer does not have a USB port, or is running Windows 95
or Windows NT 4.0, you must use a serial cable.
■
If you’re using a USB cable, navigate to the Handspring
program group and select the Handspring USB utility.
■
If you are using a USB cable, disconnect any other USB devices
you are using. If you’re connecting your cable to a USB hub,
disconnect it and connect your cable directly to your computer.
■
If you are using a serial cable, try a lower baud rate setting on
the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
■
Restart your computer.
■
If you installed a conduit from a non-Handspring software
developer, contact the developer for support.
Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Make sure that
the conduit appears on the list and that it is set to Synchronize the
files. See page 159 for details.
Troubleshooting Tips
I cannot launch the
HotSync Manager.
I am using Outlook as
my PIM, but I cannot do
a HotSync operation.
■
Make sure you are not running another program, such as
America Online, CompuServe, or WinFax, that uses the port you
selected in the Setup dialog box.
■
Reinstall the Palm Desktop software.
■
Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Make sure
that the following Outlook conduits are installed and that the
Action is set to "Synchronize the files" for each conduit:
Outlook Contacts, Outlook Calendar, Outlook Tasks, and
Outlook Notes.
■
Reinstall the Palm Desktop software and make sure you select
the option to synchronize with MS Outlook.
Beaming problems
Problem
Solution
I cannot beam data to
another IR-equipped Palm
OS device.
■
Confirm that your handheld and the other device is clear
of obstacles.
■
Check the General Preferences screen and make sure
the Beam Receive setting is on.
■
Move your handheld closer to the receiving device.
■
Move your handheld farther away from the receiving
device.
■
Angle the sides of the two devices towards each other.
■
Perform a soft reset. See page 214 for details.
■
Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of
memory available as the data you are receiving. For
example, if you are receiving a 30K application, you must
have at least 60K free.
■
Perform a soft reset. See page 214 for details.
When someone beams data
to my handheld, I get a
message telling me it is out of
memory.
Appendix B
Page 223
Password problems
Problem
Solution
I forgot the password, and my
handheld is not locked.
You can use Security to delete the password. If you do this,
your handheld deletes all entries marked as private. You can,
however, perform a HotSync operation before you delete the
password: the HotSync process backs up all entries, whether
or not they are marked private. In this case, the following
procedure restores your private entries and lets you access
them:
1. Use the Palm Desktop software and the cable to
synchronize your data.
2. Tap Forgotten Password in Security to remove the
password and delete all private records.
3. Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize your data
and restore the private records by transferring them from
your computer to your handheld.
I forgot the password and my
handheld is locked.
If you assign a password and lock your handheld, you must
perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld. See
page 215 for details.
Technical support
If you cannot solve your problem after reviewing the sources listed at the beginning of this
appendix, check our web site www.handspring.com for the latest technical support information.
Before requesting support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem. When
you do contact support, please be ready to provide the following information:
■
The name and version of the operating system you are using
■
The actual error message or state you are experiencing
■
The steps you take to reproduce the problem
Page 224
Troubleshooting Tips
Appendix C
Creating a Custom Expense Report
This section explains how to modify existing Expense application templates and how to create
your own custom expense report templates for use with the Expense application.
Note:
This section assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Excel or a similar spreadsheet
application. If you are not familiar with Microsoft Excel, consult your company’s
Information Services department or another experienced user.
About mapping tables
Before creating or modifying an Expense template, it’s important to understand the function of
the Palm™ Desktop software Expense application. In simple terms, the Expense application
moves Expense data from your handheld into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Each Expense item stored in your handheld represents a group of related data. You can link the
following data to an expense item:
■
Category
■
Payment Method
■
City
■
Date
■
Payment Currency
■
Attendees
■
Expense Type
■
Vendor
■
Note
■
Amount
When you perform a HotSync® operation between your handheld and Palm Desktop software on
your computer, the Expense data is stored on your computer (in a file named Expense.txt). When
you open the Expense application in Palm Desktop software, an Excel macro starts, and
populates an expense template with your data based on the rules specified in a spreadsheet file
named Maptable.xls.
The Maptable.xls file is an editable spreadsheet that functions as a “mapping table.” The function
of the mapping table is to guide the Excel macro in extracting the Expense data. The mapping
table tells the Excel macro how large the spreadsheet is and provides the data-cell layout of the
Excel template used for the Expense Report.
Customizing existing sample templates
Four sample Expense Report templates come with Palm Desktop software. These templates are
stored in the Template folder (which is in the same folder as the Palm Desktop software
application).
If the layout of one (or more) of these templates is appropriate for your reporting needs, you can
easily customize the templates with your company name and other information.
Appendix C
Page 225
To customize a sample Expense Report template:
1. Make a backup copy of the contents of the Template folder.
2. Double-click the name of the sample template you want to modify to open it in Microsoft
Excel.
3. Make any changes that you want to the names (or other information) in the sample template.
Important:
Do not insert rows or columns in the sample template. Doing so changes the way
your Expense data maps to the template and causes errors. If you want to move the
cells to a different location or add or delete rows or columns, you have to make
changes to the Maptable.xls file.
Note:
You can insert your own company logo without changing the Maptable.xls file. If you
change the file name, however, you need to make a corresponding change in the
Maptable.xls file.
You can also rename cells without changing the Maptable.xls file, provided that the
expense type corresponds to your handheld data. For example, you can change
“Snack” to “Munchies,” and then all items entered on your handheld as “Snack” map
to the cell(s) labeled “Munchies.”
4. From the File menu, choose Save As.
5. Click the Save as type drop-down list and choose Template (*.xlt).
6. Navigate to the Template folder (in the Palm Desktop software directory).
Note:
If you do not need to change the Maptable.xls file, save the template file with its
original file name (e.g., Sample2.xlt).
If you do need to change the Maptable.xls file, give your modified template a unique
name. Be sure to use the .xlt file suffix, which defines the file as a Microsoft Excel
template.
7. Click Save to save your modified template and make it available for future use.
Note:
If you need to modify the Maptable.xls file, you must do this before you can use the
modified template with your Expense data. To modify the Maptable.xls file for your new
template, see page 228 for details. Read all of the sections of this appendix before
making changes to the Maptable.xls file.
Page 226
Creating a Custom Expense Report
Determining the layout of the Expense Report
This section describes the layout considerations for the Expense Report and explains the terms
used for creating the report.
Labels
There are two kinds of labels that you need to define for your report: day/date and expense type.
Each kind of label can be either Fixed or Variable. A Fixed label means that the label always
appears as a header at the beginning of a row or column. If a label is not Fixed, it is variable.
For example, a list table of expenses could have variable labels in the rows for day/date, and
variable labels in the columns for expense type. In this case, neither day/date or expense type
information would be “fixed” (as a header). Instead, the date and expense type information would
be filled into the cells of the spreadsheet as appropriate.
Examples of both Fixed and Variable labels appear in the sample expense templates.
Sections
A Section is an area of the report that has common formatting. It is common for an Expense report
to have more than one Section. For example, the following sample Expense Report named
Sample3.xlt contains several Sections.
Section 1
(not prepaid)
Section 2
(prepaid)
Section 3
Because your Expense data maps to row and column areas of your final report, different Sections
require different definitions for the data mapping. To create additional Sections with different
mapping, you create corresponding additional lines to the mapping table file named Maptable.xls.
This procedure is explained later in this appendix.
If a section contains cells for prepaid (company paid) expenses, you need to create an additional
line in the mapping table for “prepaid.” This will count as an additional section in the mapping table.
The only data that differs in the prepaid section (from the non-prepaid section) is the row/column
numbers for the expense type.
Appendix C
Page 227
Analyzing your custom Expense Report
If you already have a custom Excel expense report, you can use it with a modified mapping table.
However, before you can create a Maptable.xls file that corresponds to your custom Expense
Report, you must first analyze the characteristics of your report.
Perform the following before you begin a custom mapping table:
■
Print a copy of your custom expense report. Activate the Row and Column Headings option
in the Sheet settings of the Page Setup command. This enables you to quickly determine the
size of the Section(s), as well as the numbers for the start rows and columns.
■
On the printed copy, identify the data Sections. A Section is an area of data with common row
and column formatting. A yellow highlighter marking pen can make it easy to see the Sections
as you work with programming the mapping table. Your custom Expense Report can contain
any number of Sections, and the same data can be repeated in any Section.
■
On the printed copy, identify the type of Labels that apply to each Section. Each Section can
have only one kind of Fixed or Variable Label for rows. Likewise, each Section can have only
one kind of Fixed or Variable Label for columns.
■
Place a copy of your custom Expense Report in the Template folder (in the Palm Desktop
software directory). Change the file name so it has the file extension .xlt (which defines it as
a Microsoft Excel template). Make a note of the exact file name so it can be defined in the
mapping table file.
Programming the mapping table
Once you have analyzed the components of your custom Expense Report, you can program the
mapping table to fill the report with data from the handheld.
To program a new custom mapping table:
1. Open a copy of the Maptable.xls file in Microsoft Excel.
Note:
This file is located in the same folder as the Palm Desktop software application. Make
a backup copy of this file before you make your modifications.
2. Mapping a new template. Scroll to where you find the name of the original template that you
chose for your modifications. The name of the template will appear in column B of the
Maptable.xls file, next to the cell highlighted in green that reads “Template Name:”. If you did
not modify an existing template, move to any table in the Maptable.xls file.
3. Select all the rows associated with the template name. To select the rows, click and drag on
the row numbers (left side), so they appear highlighted.
Page 228
Creating a Custom Expense Report
All rows related
to template are
selected
4. From the Edit menu, choose Copy.
5. Scroll down to a blank area of the Maptable.xls file (below the rows used for Sample4.xlt), and
click on a row number to select a blank row.
6. From the Edit menu, choose Paste. A copy of the rows you selected in step 3 is pasted into
the Maptable.xls file.
7. Name the table. In the cell immediately to the right of the cell entitled Template Name, enter
the exact file name of your custom Expense Report template.
8. Define the number of Sections. Each row in a table defines how your handheld data will be
placed in a Section of your custom Expense Report. Note that the prepaid portion of a section
has its own row and counts as a separate section for map table purposes, even though it is
not a separate section in your template.
Table with
four sections
You may add or delete rows as necessary so that the total number of rows corresponds to
the number of Sections in your custom Expense Report. To clear all of the existing settings
in a row, click to select the row and press Ctrl+Delete. Name each row to correspond to a
Section of your custom Expense Report.
9. Determine the Label settings. The orientation of the data fields (Row, Column) appears in the
yellow section of the table.
Appendix C
Page 229
Determine whether the Rows will contain expense or date information, and place an “x” in the
appropriate cell. When you do this, you also define whether the label is Fixed or Variable. You
can place only one “x” in the Row section (columns 2–5).
Determine whether the Columns will contain expense or date information, and place an “x” in
the appropriate cell. When you do this, you also define whether the label is Fixed or Variable.
You can place only one “x” in the Column section (columns 6–9).
10. Define the dimensions of the Section. The dimensions of the Section appear in the green
columns (10–13).
# of
Rows
Represents the total number of rows in the Section, excluding any header or
total rows. In other words, this includes only the number of rows in the Section
where your handheld data will be placed.
# of
Columns
Represents the total number of columns in the Section, excluding any header
or total columns. In other words, this includes only the number of columns in
the Section where your handheld data will be placed.
Start Row Is the number of the first row of the Section that will be filled with your
handheld data.
Start
Column
Is the number of the first column of the Section that will be filled with your
handheld data.
11. Define the Dates and Intervals. The dates and intervals between dates appears in the light
blue columns (14–17).
In the Date cell, enter the row or column number where all the date information will be placed.
In the Dates cell, enter the number of blank columns (or rows) separating the date fields. If
there are no blank columns (or rows) between date entries, leave this number set to zero.
In the Start Day cell, enter the day of the week that starts the expense reporting period. Enter
a three-character abbreviation for the day (e.g., Sun, Mon, Tue).
In the Day cell, enter the row or column number where all the day information will be placed.
If the dates are in a row or in a column, enter the row or column number.
12. Define whether the Section is in list format. This setting appears in the light purple columns
(18–19).
Page 230
Creating a Custom Expense Report
If the Section will present the data in a list format, enter the word “yes”. Otherwise, enter the
word “no”. The following diagram shows data presented in a list format:
Only if your section is in list format: In the Expense Type cell, enter the number of the row or
column where the expense description will be placed. Expense amounts can be entered in
several different columns or rows if required by your template. Expense type labels must all
appear in the same column.
13. Enter the row or column numbers for the expense types that appear in the Section. These
settings appear in the aqua columns (20–48).
For these settings, simply enter the row or column number for the expense types that you
want to appear in the Section. Note that the same row or column number can be used more
than once. An example of this would be meals that encompass breakfast, lunch, dinner, and
snacks. In the previous example, all expense items would be populated into row/column 4 of
the custom Expense Report.
14. Complete the table. All of the remaining columns (49–57) in the table are used to define the
column or row number that corresponds to the description.
15. Mark a Section for prepaid expenses (yellow column). If a row in the map table is for prepaid
(company paid) expenses, type a “yes” in the cell on that Section’s row. Type “no” in all the
cells of this column that do not pertain to prepaid expenses.
16. Repeat steps 9 through 15 for each Section you defined for your custom Expense Report.
17. Map Expense Report Options dialog (magenta section). The Expense Report Options dialog
has five fields where you can fill in data for the header on your expense report. Use this
section to specify the row and column on your template where this information is mapped.
Because header data is not related to any particular Section, you have to fill in only one row.
If the item does not appear on your template, leave these cells blank.
Appendix C
Page 231
Using applications other than Microsoft Excel
You can use applications other than Microsoft Excel (such as Lotus 1-2-3 or Quattro Pro) to open
and manipulate the Expense data on your computer. The data file is named “Expense.txt,” and is
stored in the Expense folder, within the folder containing the handheld user data.
Expense data in the Expense.txt file is in tab-delimited format.
Expense file details
The Expense.txt file contains four groups of data. It will be easier to see these four distinct groups
of data if you open the file with a spreadsheet application.
Trips
Shows the number of Expense application categories, and lists each one
followed by an “end” statement.
Currency
Shows how many currencies were used for the Expense data, and lists the
countries that correspond to that currency.
Trip
Shows the number of expenses by category, and lists the expenses for
each category.
Expenses
Shows the total number of expenses, and lists them chronologically.
Page 232
Creating a Custom Expense Report
Appendix D
Non-ASCII Characters
for Login Scripts
The following information enables you to create custom login scripts that require non-ASCII
characters. It is provided for advanced users who understand the use and requirements of such
characters in a custom login script.
Use of ^char
You may use the caret ( ^ ) to transmit ASCII command characters. If you send ^char, and the
ASCII value of char is between @ and _, then the character is automatically translated to a singlebyte value between 0 and 31.
For example, ^M is converted to a carriage return. If char is a value between a and z, then the
character sequence is translated to a single-byte value between 1 and 26. If char is any other
value, then the character sequence is not subject to any special processing.
For example, the string “Joe^M” transmits Joe, followed by a carriage return.
Carriage return and line feed
You may include carriage return and line feed commands as part of the login script, when entered
in the following format:
<cr>
Sends or receives a carriage return
<lf>
Sends or receives a line feed
For example, the string “waitfor Joe<cr><lf>” waits to receive Joe followed by a carriage return
and line feed from the remote computer before executing the next command in the script.
Literal characters
The backslash ( \ ) character defines that the next character is transmitted as a literal character,
and is not subject to any special processing ordinarily associated with that character.
Examples:
\^
Includes a caret as part of the string
\<
Includes a < as part of the string
\\
Includes a backslash as part of the string
Appendix D
Page 233
Page 234
Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts
Warranty and
Other Product Information
Product Warranty
WARRANTY. Handspring warrants to you that at the date of purchase, the product is free of defects in workmanship and materials, and the software included in the product will perform in substantial compliance to its program
specifications.
EXCLUSIONS FROM WARRANTY. This warranty does not cover physical damage to the surface of the product,
including, without limitation, breakage, cracks, dents, scratches or adhesive marks on the LCD touchscreen or outside casing of the product caused by you or a third party. In addition, this warranty shall not apply (i) if the casing
for the product is opened by someone other than an authorized Handspring representative; (ii) if the defect or malfunction is caused by your or a third party's misuse, accident, modification of the product's components, or operation
of the product in an unsuitable environment or in a manner for which it is not intended; (iii) if Handspring's testing
and examination discloses that the alleged defect or malfunction in the product does not exist, (iv) if the defect or
malfunction results from the use of the product in conjunction with accessories, other products, or ancillary or peripheral equipment and Handspring determines that there is no fault with the product itself; or (v) if the defect or
malfunction is due to any communication service you may subscribe to or use with the product. Handspring shall
not be responsible for software, firmware, information, or memory data contained in, stored on, or integrated with
any products returned to Handspring for repair, whether under warranty or not. Handspring makes no warranty or
representation that its software products will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware
or applications software products provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected.
REMEDIES. Handspring shall, at its discretion, either replace the product with a comparable product, repair the
product, or refund the purchase price paid for the product. Replacement products may be new or reconditioned.
WARRANTY PERIOD. The warranty period is one (1) year from your date of purchase. Handspring warrants any
replaced or repaired product for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of shipment back to you, or through the
end of the original warranty period, whichever is longer.
OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE. In order to obtain warranty service, you must receive warranty service authorization by contacting Handspring within the warranty period and provide dated proof of original purchase. For further information about the warranty service procedure, please visit our website at http://www.handspring.com.
WARRANTY EXCLUSIVE. This warranty is exclusive and Handspring will not assume and hereby expressly disclaims any further warranties, including, but not limited to, any warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular
purpose and non-infringement.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. To the full extent allowed by law, Handspring's liability is limited to repair or replacement of the product, or refund of the purchase price paid. Handspring shall not be liable for any incidental, consequential, indirect, special or punitive damages of any kind, or for loss of revenue or profits, loss of business, loss of
information or data, or other financial loss arising out of or in connection with the sale, installation, maintenance, use,
performance, failure, or interruption of this product.
GOVERNING LAW. This warranty will be governed by the laws of California, and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. The courts of California shall have exclusive personal jurisdiction in case of any disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty.
Page 235
Handspring, Inc.
End User Software License Agreement
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS SOFTWARE, THE USE OF WHICH IS LICENSED BY HANDSPRING, INC. AND ITS
SUPPLIERS (COLLECTIVELY, “HANDSPRING”), TO ITS CUSTOMERS FOR THEIR USE ONLY AS SET FORTH
BELOW.
SOFTWARE LICENSE: Handspring grants you a nonexclusive license to use the accompanying software program(s) (the “Software”) subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this End User Software License Agreement (“License Agreement”). You are not permitted to lease or rent, distribute or sublicense the Software or to use
the Software in a time-sharing arrangement or in any other unauthorized manner. Further, no license is granted to
you in the human readable code of the Software (source code). Except as provided below, this License Agreement
does not grant you any rights to patents, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks, or any other rights in respect to the
Software.
The Software is licensed to be used solely on or in connection with Handspring products. With respect to the Desktop Software, you may reproduce and provide one (1) copy of such Software for each personal computer on which
such Software is used as permitted hereunder. With respect to the Device Software, you may use such Software
only on one (1) Handspring product. Otherwise, the Software and supporting documentation may be copied only as
essential for backup or archive purposes in support of your use of the Software as permitted hereunder. You must
reproduce and include all copyright notices and any other proprietary rights notices appearing on the Software on
any copies that you make.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License Agreement, this License Agreement shall not be deemed to
apply to any applications software licensed to you by third parties that is included on the same media as Handspring's Software (“Other Software”) if the Other Software provides that the use of the Other Software is subject to
the terms and conditions of the third party's license agreement.
Portions of the Software are licensed to Handspring, and from Handspring to you, pursuant to the GNU Library General Public License (“GNU Software”), a copy of which is supplied herewith and incorporated herein in its entirety
by this reference. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License Agreement, this License Agreement shall not
be deemed to apply to the GNU Software. Source code versions of the GNU Software are available at Handspring's
web site, currently located at www.handspring.com.
PAYMENT OF FEES: The effectiveness of the licenses granted hereunder is conditioned on the receipt by Handspring of any applicable fees.
NO ASSIGNMENT; NO REVERSE ENGINEERING: You may transfer the Software and this License Agreement to
another party in connection with a transfer of the Handspring product upon which the Software is used, if the other
party agrees in writing to accept the terms and conditions of this License Agreement. If you transfer the Software,
you must at the same time either transfer all copies of the Software as well as the supporting documentation to the
same party or destroy any such materials not transferred. Except as set forth above, you may not transfer or assign
the Software or your rights under this License Agreement.
Modification, reverse engineering, reverse compiling, or disassembly of the Software is expressly prohibited. However, if you are a European Union (“EU”) resident, information necessary to achieve interoperability of the Software
with other programs within the meaning of the EU Directive on the Legal Protection of Computer Programs is available to you from Handspring upon written request.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You agree that you will not export or re-export the Software or accompanying documentation (or any copies thereof) or any products utilizing the Software or such documentation in violation of any applicable laws or regulations of the United States or the country in which you obtained them. The software covered by
this License Agreement may contain strong data encryption code which cannot be exported outside of the U.S. or
Canada. You agree that you will not export/reexport, either physically or electronically, the encryption software or
accompanying documentation without obtaining written authorization from the U.S. Department of Commerce.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND: If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of
the United States Government, the following provisions apply. The Software constitutes a “commercial item”, as that
term is defined at Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of “commercial computer
software” and “commercial computer software documentation”, as such terms are used in FAR 12.212 (Sept.
Page 236
Warranty and Other Product Information
1995), and is provided to the U.S. Government only as commercial software (with “Restricted Rights”, if applicable).
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in this License Agreement
and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT
1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable.
TERM AND TERMINATION: This License Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it at any time
by destroying the Software and documentation together with all copies and merged portions in any form. It will also
terminate immediately if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License Agreement. Upon such termination you agree to destroy the Software and documentation, together with all copies and merged portions in any
form.
GOVERNING LAW: This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California as such laws
are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents
and by the laws of the United States. You agree that the conflicts of laws principles of such laws and the United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (1980) are hereby excluded in its entirety from
application to this License Agreement.
LIMITED WARRANTY; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: All warranties and limitations of liability applicable to the Software are as stated on the Limited Warranty or in the product manual accompanying the Software. Such warranties
and limitations of liability are incorporated herein in their entirety by this reference.
SEVERABILITY: In the event any provision of this License Agreement is found to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable,
the validity, legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired
and a valid, legal and enforceable provision of similar intent and economic impact shall be substituted therefor.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT: This License Agreement sets forth the entire understanding and agreement between you
and Handspring, supersedes all prior agreements, whether written or oral, with respect to the Software, and may be
amended only in a writing signed by both parties.
GNU Library General Public License
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary
GPL.]
PREAMBLE: The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation
software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
If you link a program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink
them with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
Page 237
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty
for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that
what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies
distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was
designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything
in it is the same as in the ordinary license.
The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make
between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing
the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application
program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original
library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote
software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might
promote sharing better.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from
the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of
non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the
free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header
files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will
lead to faster development of free libraries.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived
from the library, while the latter only works together with the library.
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special
one.
Terms and Conditions for Copying, Distribution and Modification
1.
This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License
(also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms.
A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
“modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Page 238
Warranty and Other Product Information
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the
Library does.
2.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
3.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
4.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also
meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must
make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the
facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function
in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.
Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole,
and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based
on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this License.
5.
You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2
of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you
wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
Page 239
6.
You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
7.
A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true
is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are
linked directly with the Library itself.
8.
As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or link a “work that uses the Library” with the
Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution
displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and,
if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the
Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce
a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a
copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
Page 240
Warranty and Other Product Information
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not
normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
9.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together
with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
10. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
11. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
12. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives
a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
13. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
14. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit
geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
this License.
15. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Library General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Page 241
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify
a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
16. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
17. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
18. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Library
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these
terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and
a pointer to where the full notice is found.
One line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this library; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you
work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a
sample; alter the names:
Page 242
Warranty and Other Product Information
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
Signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
FCC Statement
This device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the device if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you need assistance, contact Handspring Customer Care.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
■
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
■
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
■
Connect the equipment into an outlet or circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
■
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help and for additional suggestions.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host
devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the
manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without
written approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Responsible Party:
Handspring, Inc.
189 Bernardo Avenue
Mountain View, California 94043-5203
United States of America
(650) 230-5000
Canadian RFI Statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur le matériel brouilleur du
Canada.
Page 243
Acknowledgments
We would like to thank the following developers whose contributions were an integral part of the Handspring
product:
■
C.E. Steuart Dewar
Pimlico Software, Inc.
www.gorilla-haven.org/pimlico
■
Darren Beck
Code City
www.codecity.com.au
■
Rick Huebner
www.probe.net/~rhuebner/index.html
Page 244
Warranty and Other Product Information
Index
A
ABA (Address Book archive file) 34
Accented characters
entering 31
onscreen keyboard 33
Add-on applications 40–43
Address Book
archive files (.aba) 34
Address Book.See Contacts
Alarm
preset 99
reminder 99
setting 85
sound 99, 142
for untimed events 85
Anniversaries. See Repeating events
Application buttons 15, 37, 54, 55, 138
Applications
beaming 78–80
Blazer 195
Calculator 59
categories 38
CityTime 58
Contacts 55
Date Book Plus 54
Expense 60
font style 76
installing 40–42
Memo Pad 57
opening 37
Palm SMS 204
preferences for 39
removing 42
security 47
To Do List 56
viewing as icons 38
viewing as list 38
See also Add-on applications
Applications Launcher 37–39
Appointments. See Date Book Plus
Archive files
importing data from 34
for main applications 34
saving deleted records 63
saving purged records 64
Automatic fill, in Expense 135
Auto-off delay 141
Autotext. See Keyboard ShortCuts
B
Backup. See HotSync
Battery
charging 17
conserving power 141
gauge 37
BCC (blind carbon copy) 180
Beaming
See also Infrared
Beaming information 78–80
location of IR port 15
problems with 223
Birthdays. See Repeating events
Blazer
adding bookmarks 197, 198
Bookmark view 196
deleting bookmarks 199
editing bookmarks 198
menus 200
organizing bookmarks 199
overview 195
Preferences 202
Properties 201
Web Page view 195
Bold font for text 76
Bookmarks
adding 197, 198
arranging 199
deleting 199
editing 198
Brightness Control 14, 16
Business card for beaming 78
Buttons
power 15
scroll 14
Buttons preferences 138
C
Cable
connecting to computer 23
for local HotSync operations 76, 77
mobile phone 193, 194
serial 12, 23, 158, 222
USB 12, 23
Calculator
Advanced mode 119
Area view 125
Basic mode 118
buttons explained 118, 119–126
Finance view 121
Length view 124
Logic view 123
Math view 120
memory 118
menus 127
opening 59, 118
overview 59
recent calculations 59, 119
selecting mode 118
Statistics view 123
Trigonometry view 121
Volume view 126
Weight/Temp view 124
Calibration 19, 140, 218
Call Waiting, disabling 146, 166
Calling card, using in phone settings 146,
166
Capital letters 27
Card. See Expansion Card
Caring for the handheld 213
Categories
application 38
assigning records to 65
beaming 78–79
creating 66–67
default 65
displaying 66, 107, 221
folders for e-mail 185
merging 67
renaming 67
using in Applications Launcher 38
cc:Mail 173
Chain calculations 119
Charger
connecting 17, 23
connector on handheld 16
Page 246
Charging battery 17
Check boxes 19
CityTime
adding cities 117
home city 116
menus 117
opening 58
overview 116
remote cities 116
Clearing Calculator entries 118, 120
COM port. See USB, port and Serial port
Combining categories 67
Comma delimited files, importing data
from 34
Command buttons 19
Command equivalents (keyboard) 30
Compressing Day view 98
Conduits 159
for connecting to PIMs 25
for modem HotSync operations 167
for synchronizing applications 222,
159–160, 216
See also HotSync
Confirming e-mail 181
Conflicting events 93
Connecting
HotSync cable 23
service templates 147
to server or ISP 147
travel charger 17, 23
Connection preferences 139
Contacts
*If Found Call* entry 104
adding custom fields 108
business card for beaming 78
copying 104
copying records 104
creating contact records 103–104
creating records 61, 103
deleting records 63
dialing from 105
Dialing Preferences 107
displaying category 107
finding records 68
fonts 76
menus 106
notes for records 75
opening 55
overview 55
private records 73
sorting records 72
Index
Continuous events
changing 87
deleting from Date Book Plus 64, 87
scheduling 86
Contrast control 14, 16
Copying
contact information 104
Copying text 63
Country default setting 140
Cradle. See Cable
Creating
categories 38, 66–67
contact entries 103
currency symbols 130
custom fields in Contacts 108
Date Book Plus events 82
e-mail 176–177
Expense items 128
expense reports in Excel 132–134
memos 114
notes for records 75
records 61
To Do List items 109
Currency
default 135
defining 130
for Expense items 130
Current date 22, 221
Current time 37
displaying in Date Book Plus 88
setting 21
Customizing
categories 67
currencies and symbols 130
expense reports 225–232
fields in Contacts 108
HotSync settings 159
See also Preferences
Cutting text 62
Cycling through views 54
D
Daily
calendar 82–84
events. See Repeating events
Journal 94
Data
entry. See Entering data
transfer. See HotSync
Index
Date Book
archive files (.dba) 34
Date Book Plus
adding Contacts data to records
69–70
alarm 85
changing event time 84
changing event to untimed 84
changing repeating events 87
conflicting events 93
continuous events 86–88
creating records 61, 82–84
Daily Journal 94
Day view 88
deleting records 63
deleting repeating events 87
end time for Day view 97
Event tracking 94
floating events 93
fonts 76
List View 92
menus 96
Month view 91
notes for records 75
opening 54
overview 54
private records 73
purging records 64
repeating events 64, 86–88
scheduling events 82–84
selecting dates 82
start time for Day view 97
Sunday or Monday to start week 141
switching views 88
templates 95
To Do List items 94
untimed events 83
Week view 89, 141, 221
Week View with Text 90
Year View 91
Dates
Expense item 128
setting current 22, 221
showing in Mail list 185
To Do List record due 109–110,
110–111
Day (Date Book Plus view) 83, 98
Daylight savings 22
DBA (Date Book archive file) 34
Decimal point 141
Page 247
Default
categories 65
currency in Expense 135
settings. See Preferences
Deleted
data, saving in archive files 63
e-mail, recovering 184
Deleting
applications 40, 42
Bookmarks 199
Desktop software 43
e-mail 184
passwords 48
records 63
service templates 152
text 62
See also Purging records
Delivering e-mail 179, 181
Desktop E-Mail application
applications supported 173
managing 172–191
support of Mail features 178
Desktop software 24–25
configuring mail 173–174
linking to external files 170
removing 43
saving deleted data to an archive
file 63
system requirements 12
upgrading 12
See also PIM
Dialing
applications 107
from Contacts list 105
Digitizer 19, 140, 218
Display, contrast (brightness) control 14
DNS (Domain Naming System) 149
Docking station. See Cable
Double-booked events 93
Draft e-mail 182
Dragging
memos into other applications 57
using the stylus 19
E-mail addresses
in Contacts 104
looking up 177–178
E-mail items. See Mail
Entering data 27–35
importing from other applications
34–35
using keyboard 27–31
using the computer keyboard 33
using the onscreen keyboard 33
Entries. See Contacts
Eudora 173
Events. See Date Book Plus
Excel, transferring Expense data to
132–134
Exchanging data. See HotSync
Exclamation marks in To Do List 112
Expansion Card
applications 45
copying applications 45
formatting 47
inserting 44
renaming 47
using 44–47
Expense
adding Contacts data to records 71
categorizing records 65
creating records 61, 128
currency 130, 135
date of item 128
defining new currency 130
deleting records 63
menus 134
notes for records 75
opening 60
overview 60
purging records 64
receipt details 129
reports in Excel 132–134, 225–232
sorting records 72
templates for reports 133
type 129, 135
vendor 130
E
F
Edit
Files, linking to external 170
Filing e-mail 183
Filters for e-mail 187–190
SMS messages 208
Editing
records 62–63
unsent e-mail 181
Page 248
Index
Finding
applications 37
e-mail addresses 177–178
information in applications 67–71
phone numbers 69–70
using the Find application 69
Floating events 93
Folders for e-mail 185
Fonts 76
Formats preferences 140
Frozen handheld 218
G
Games 142
General preferences
alarm sounds 142
auto-off delay 141
system sounds 142
Glossary. See Keyboard ShortCuts
GSM 154, 204–210, 220
H
Handheld
contrast control 14, 16
overview 11
Hard reset 215
Header information (e-mail) 175, 176
Help
Keyboard 63
online tips 20
Hiding
records 73
See also Private records
High Priority e-mail filter 189
HotSync
buttons preferences 138
conduits for synchronizing
applications 159–160, 216
customizing 159
defined 76
first-time operation 77–78, 171–172
for managing desktop E-Mail
173–174
HotSync Manager 76
IR operation 160–164
linking to external files 170
local operation 77, 158
modem operation 158, 164–167
modem settings 165
Index
network operation 168
operations using IR port 160–164
options for filtering e-mail 186–190
problems with 222–223
setting options 157–158
for synchronizing data 24
I
Icons
alarm 85
application 38
note 75
online Tips 20
onscreen 218
repeating event 87
Idle timeout of ISP or server
connection 149
Ignoring e-mail. See Filters for e-mail
Importing data 34–35
Inbox 185
Indicators
battery 15
Infrared
HotSync operations 160–164
port 160
requirements for computer 160
Infrared port. See IR port
Installing
applications 40–42
conduit to install applications 159
Desktop software 24–25, 217
Mail. See Mail, desktop configuration
Instant Lookup 68
International characters
entering 31
onscreen keyboard 33
IP address 148, 150
IR port 15
See also Beaming information
IR. See Infrared
Items. See To Do List or Expense
K
Keyboard
accented characters 31
capital letters 27
computer 33
location 15
locking 15, 16
Page 249
menu commands 30
moving the cursor 29
numbers 28
online Help 63
onscreen 33
ShortCuts for entering data 30,
154–155
unlocking 15, 16
L
Lanyard holder 14
LED 15, 17
Letters
font style 76
onscreen keyboard 33
Light, see LED 15
Linking
external file 170
with desktop software. See HotSync
List (Date Book Plus view) 92
List, in Applications Launcher 38
Locking
handheld with a password 49–50,
153
keyboard 15, 16
records. See Security
Login scripts 150, 233
Looking up Address Book data
to add to e-mail addresses 177–178
Looking up Contacts data
to add to other records 69–70
scrolling in Contacts 68
Looking up. See Finding
Lost handheld, contact for 104
Lost records 221
Lotus
1-2-3, for expense reports 232
cc:Mail 173
Organizer, importing data from 34
M
Mail
address lookup 177–178
attachments 187
BCC (blind carbon copy) 178, 180
changing setup 174
closing 175
confirm delivery 178, 181
confirm read 178, 181
Page 250
creating 176–177
deleting e-mail 184
desktop configuration 173–174
draft e-mail 182
editing unsent e-mail 181
filing e-mail 183
filtering options 186–190
folders 185
HotSync options 173–174
menus 191
opening 174
overview 172
priority of delivery 178, 179
purging deleted e-mail 184
recovering deleted 184
replying to e-mail 177
sending 181
showing dates 185
signature 178, 180–181
sorting 186
synchronizing 174
truncating 190
viewing e-mail 175
Main applications 37
Maintenance information 213
Meetings. See Date Book Plus
Memo Pad
adding Contacts data to records
69–70
archive files (.mpa) 34
categorizing records 65
creating records 61, 114
deleting records 63
dragging memos into other
applications 57
fonts 76
menus 115
opening 57
overview 57
private records 73
reviewing memos 114
sorting records 72, 221
See also Notes
Memory
for beaming 223
Calculator 118
regaining 64
Memos. See Memo Pad
Menus 29–30, 218
Blazer 200
choosing 29
Index
command equivalents (keyboard) 30
Contacts 106
Date Book Plus 96
Edit menu 62–63
Expense 134
Mail 191
Memo Pad 115, 117, 127
menu bar 19, 29
Network Preferences 152
Palm SMS 209
To Do List 112
Messages
receiving 205
text 204
Microsoft
Excel, transferring Expense data
to 132–134
Outlook 173
Outlook, connecting to 223
Windows 95, 98 160
Mobile phone
connecting to 194
using handheld with 193–211
Modem
HotSync operations via 164–167
Monday, to start week 141
Month (Date Book Plus view) 91
Moving
Date Book Plus events 84
the cursor 29
MPA (Memo Pad archive file) 34
Multi-day events. See Repeating events
MultiMediaCard. See Expansion Card
N
Network
connecting 147
connection type 148
idle timeout 149
login scripts 150
password 144
phone settings 145
preferences 142–153
primary DNS 149
secondary DNS 149
selecting service 142
user name 143
Network HotSync operation 168
Index
Notes
attaching to records 75
See also Memo Pad
Numbers
decimal point and thousands
separator 141
entering 28
onscreen keyboard 33
O
One-Touch Mail 211
1-2-3, for expense reports 232
Onscreen keyboard 33, 63
Opening
applications 37
Calculator 59, 118
CityTime 58
Contacts 55
Date Book Plus 54
Expense 60
Mail 174
Memo Pad 57
To Do List 56
Organizer (Lotus PIM) 34
Outbox 181, 185
Outlook 173
Outlook, connecting to 223
Overlapping events 93
Overview
handheld 11
Owner preferences 153
P
Palm Desktop software. See Desktop software
Palm SMS
changing messages 208
creating messages 206
menus 209
overview 204
receiving messages 205
signature 207
Passwords 48–51
changing 48
creating 48
deleting 48
for network 144
forgotten 50, 224
Page 251
Pasting text 63
Payment, Expense item 129
Personal information managers. See PIM
Phone Lookup 69–70
Phone numbers
selecting types 104
Phone settings for ISP or dial-in
server 145–147
Pick lists 19
PIM (personal information manager)
using with handheld 25
Ports
IR on handheld 160
Ports. See USB, port and Serial port
Power button 15
PPP 148
PRC (application file extension) 41
Preferences 21
Blazer 202
Buttons 138
choosing 39
Connection 139
Date & Timel 140
dialing 107
Digitizer 140
Formats 140
General 141
HotSync buttons 138
Network 142–153
Owner 153
ShortCuts 154
Primary DNS 149
Printing
expense reports from Excel 132–134
records from applications 24
Prioritizing To Do List records 109, 112
Priority of delivery (e-mail) 179
Private records
displaying and creating 73, 221
lost with forgotten password 50
See also Security
Profiles 171
Proxy server 203
Punctuation marks
onscreen keyboard 33
typing 28
Purging
deleted e-mail 184
records 64
See also Deleting
Page 252
Q
Quattro Pro, for expense reports 232
Quick Lookup 68
R
Range of times in Day view 97
Reading e-mail on device 175
Receipts, recording in Expense 129
Receiving data. See Beaming information
Records
beaming 78–79
choosing categories 65
Contacts 103
creating 61
Date Book Plus 82
defined 61
deleting 63, 87
displaying a category of 66
editing 62–63
Expense 128
fonts 76
hiding private 47, 73
lost 221
Memo Pad 114
notes for 75
private 73
purging 64
sorting 72
To Do List 109
Recovering
deleted e-mail 184
filed mail 183
Recurring events
deleting 64
scheduling 86
Reminder. See Alarm
Removing
applications 42
Desktop software 43
Renaming categories 67
Repeating events
deleting from Date Book Plus 64
scheduling 86
Replying to e-mail 177
Rescheduling events 84
Reset button 16
Index
Resetting handheld
hard reset 215
location of reset button 16, 214
soft reset 214
warm reset 215
Retrieving e-mail. See Filters for e-mail
S
Saving
data 38, 61, 63
draft e-mail 182
Scheduling events 82–84
Screen
blank 218
brightness control 14, 16
calibrating 19, 140
caring for 213
contrast control 14, 16
touching 15
scroll 68
Scroll bar 20
Scroll buttons 14, 20
SD. See Expansion Card
Searching. See Finding
Secondary DNS 149
Secure Digital. See Expansion Card
Security 47–51
changing password 48
deleting password 48
displaying owner’s name 153
forgotten password 50
locking the handheld 49
private records 73
Selecting
date for event 82
e-mail to be synchronized. See Filters
for e-mail
phone numbers in Contacts list 104
text 62, 63
Sending
data. See Beaming information
e-mail 176–177, 181
Serial port 12, 16, 158, 165, 222
Service templates 147, 152
Service, selecting for network 142
Settings. See Preferences
Short Message Service. See Palm SMS
ShortCuts
backing up 159
managing 154–155
Index
menu commands 30
predefined 31
using 30
Showing dates in Mail list 185
Signature 207
Signature for e-mail 180–181
SMS. See Palm SMS
Soft reset 214
Sorting
applications 38
e-mail items 186
records 72, 221
Standing Meetings. See Repeating events
Starting applications 37
Storing e-mail 183
Strap 14
Stylus 15
dragging with 19
holding 15
tapping with 19
Sunday, to start week 141
Symbols
for currency 130
Synchronizing data. See HotSync
System conduit 159
System requirements for Desktop
software 12
System sounds 142
T
Tab delimited files, importing data from 34
Tapping 19, 218
Task. See To Do List
TCP/IP 142, 152, 154
TDA (To Do List archive file) 34
Technical Support 224
Templates
for Date Book Plus 95
for expense reports 133
Text
copying 63
cutting 62
entry. See Entering data
finding 67
fonts for 76
importing data from files 34
selecting all 63
Thousands separator 141
Page 253
Time
alarm setting 85
format 141
setting current 21
setting event 82
start and end for Date Book Plus Day
view 97
Time bars in Date Book Plus 98
Time stamps 94
Tips, online 20
To Do List
adding Contacts data to records
69–70
archive files (.tda) 34
categorizing records 65, 100, 112
checking off items 94, 111
completed items 112
completion date 112
creating items in Date Book Plus 94
creating records 61, 109
deleting records 63
due date 109–110, 110–111, 112
fonts 76
menus 112
notes for records 75
opening 56
overview 56
prioritizing records 109, 112
private records 73
purging records 64, 112
sorting records 72
viewing items in Date Book Plus 90,
92
Today. See Current date
Tracking events 94
Transferring data. See HotSync
Transmitting data. See Beaming information
Troubleshooting 217–224
Truncating e-mail 190
Turning off handheld
automatically 141
problems with 218
Turning on handheld
application buttons 15
displaying owner’s name 153
problems with 218
Typing
punctuation marks 28
Typing. See Entering data
Page 254
U
Undoing actions 62
Uninstalling Desktop software 43
Unlocking
keyboard 16
Unresponsive handheld 218
Unsent e-mail, editing 181
Untimed events 83, 84, 85
Updating data. See HotSync
Upgrading Desktop software 12
USB
connector 16
HotSync operations 222
port 24
User name
for ISP 143
identifying handheld 153
User profiles 171
V
Vendor for Expense item 130
W
Warm reset 215
Warranty 235
Web pages
bookmarking 196
viewing 195
Web sites 25
Week (Date Book Plus view) 89, 141, 221
Week with Text (Date Book Plus view) 90
Windows 95, NT 12, 23, 222
Wireless communication
Blazer web browser 195–203
installing software 193
One-Touch Mail 211
Palm SMS 204–210
using mobile phone 194
Wireless Suite 193–211
X
XLT (Expense report template in
Excel) 133
Y
Year (Date Book Plus view) 91
Index